Saturn | 2007 Relay | Specifications | Saturn 2007 Relay Specifications

2007 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 14
Safety Belts ............................................ 32
Child Restraints ...................................... 56
Airbag System ........................................ 83
Restraint System Check
....................... 101
Features and Controls ..............................
Keys .....................................................
Doors and Locks ..................................
Windows ...............................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems
.......................
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle .....
Mirrors ..................................................
OnStar® System ...................................
Universal Home Remote System
..........
Storage Areas
......................................
103
105
114
130
133
138
153
154
156
167
Instrument Panel ....................................... 177
Instrument Panel Overview ................... 180
Climate Controls ................................... 205
M
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
.......................................... 219
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............ 234
Audio System(s) ................................... 270
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 357
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 358
Towing
................................................. 396
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under
the Hood ...........................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
409
412
414
420
455
460
462
501
510
511
518
1
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 519
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 520
Customer Assistance Information ............. 537
Customer Assistance and Information ... 538
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 552
Index .......................................................... 555
2
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be equipped with all of them. For example,
more than one entertainment system may be
offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
SATURN, SATURN Emblem, and the name
RELAY are registered trademarks of Saturn
Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM are
registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15869250 A First Printing
©
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,” “Do
Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Power Seats ............................................... 10
Heated Seats .............................................. 10
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 11
Head Restraints .......................................... 13
Rear Seats .................................................... 14
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 14
Bucket Seats ............................................... 14
Captain Chairs ............................................ 22
Third Row Seat ........................................... 27
Safety Belts .................................................. 32
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 32
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 37
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 38
Driver Position ............................................. 38
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 47
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 48
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 48
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 49
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 52
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 55
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 55
Child Restraints ............................................ 56
Older Children ............................................. 56
Infants and Young Children ......................... 59
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 63
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 67
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 69
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 77
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ......................... 79
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 83
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 86
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 89
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 91
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 91
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................... 92
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 93
8
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 99
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 100
Restraint System Check ............................. 101
Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 101
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 102
Front Seats
{CAUTION:
Manual Seats
Use the lever located on
the front of the seat to
adjust the seat
forward or rearward.
Pull up on the lever to
unlock the seat.
Slide the seat to where
you want it and
release the lever.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to
move the seat back and forth with your body.
9
Power Seats
Heated Seats
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used
to operate them are
located on the outboard
side of the seats.
Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the
heated seat buttons are located on the climate
control panel.
This feature will heat the lower cushions of the
driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Press this button once
to turn the heated seat
on to the high setting.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the control up
or down.
10
Driver’s Side Button
shown, Passenger’s
Side similar
Both indicator lights next to the heated seat
symbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the high
setting. Press the button a second time to go to the
low setting. One indicator will be lit. Press the
button a third time to turn the heated seat off.
This feature will turn off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The
lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seats.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
11
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
12
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
13
The height of the head restraints can be adjusted
on the first and second row seats. Pull the
head restraint up or push it down to adjust it.
The head restraints on the third row seat cannot
be adjusted.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and
straps used to adjust, remove, and reinstall
the seats. By using the levers and straps in the
correct order, you can easily remove the seats
from the vehicle. If your vehicle has second row
captain chairs with airbags, the seats cannot
be removed.
When reinstalling the seats, make sure the seats
are in the proper positions.
If your vehicle has a second row center console, it
can be removed. See Second Row Center
Console on page 171. Do not put a seat in the
center position because the safety belt cannot be
worn properly in this position. See Safety Belts:
They Are for Everyone on page 32.
14
Bucket Seats
Your vehicle may have bucket seats in the second
row. These seats can be adjusted several
different ways.
Fold and Tumble Feature
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
The second row bucket seats can be folded and
tumbled forward. Use this feature for exiting and
entering third row seats, if the vehicle has them.
1. Make sure the adjustable head restraints are
in the fully lowered position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback
flat on the seat.
4. Release the rear set
of seat hooks from
the floor pins by
pulling the nylon
strap, located at the
base of the seat. Use
the strap to guide the
seat forward.
To return the seat to the original position, do the
following:
You can do this by either pulling on the nylon
strap, located on the rear right hand side
of the seat, or by lifting the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback.
1. Align the seat so that the rear hooks on the
seat are over the rear floor pins. Push down
firmly on the rear of the seat so that the
rear hooks attach to the rear floor pins.
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked
to the floor.
3. Slide the seat all the way back in this position.
15
3. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback, to raise the seatback to the upright
position.
Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forward
and Rearward
There are two adjustment levers on the second
row bucket seats that enable them to move
forward or rearward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
One is located below the front of the seat.
16
The other lever is
located on the rear
of the seat.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
The seatback on a bucket seat can either
be folded forward or reclined using the nylon strap
or the recline lever.
To adjust the second row bucket seats forward or
rearward, do the following:
1. Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward
or rearward.
2. Release the lever when the seat is in the
desired position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked.
Nylon Strap
Recline Lever
To fold the seatback forward, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback to release the seatback.
17
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
18
To raise the seatback to the upright position from
a reclined position, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline lever
while raising the seatback until it locks to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline lever.
2. Press back on the seatback until it is in
the desired position
3. Let go of the strap or lever.
Removing the Bucket Seats
To remove the bucket seats, do the following:
1. Make sure the head restraint is in the
fully lowered position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback flat on the seat, by either
pulling on the nylon strap, located on the rear
right hand side of the seat, or by lifting the
recline lever, located on the front right
hand side of the seatback.
3. Lift either one of the adjuster levers and slide
the seat to the most rearward position. See
“Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forward and
Rearward” earlier in this section.
4. Release the rear set of hooks from the floor
pins by pulling the nylon strap, located at the
base of the seat. Use the strap to guide
the seat forward.
19
Installing the Bucket Seats
{CAUTION:
5. To release the front seat hooks from the floor
pins, squeeze the angled bar, located beneath
the seat toward the straight crossbar.
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward,
then toward the rear of the vehicle while
pulling it out. This should be done in
one motion.
20
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not install the seat facing the rear of the
vehicle, as it will not lock into place. If more
storage room is needed behind the seat, slide the
seat forward.
Make sure the seat is in the full rear position
before beginning this procedure.
To install the bucket seats, do the following:
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled bar
beneath the seat toward the straight crossbar,
while placing the front hooks of the seat
into the front two floor pins.
2. Make sure the seat
is angled so that the
front seat hooks
clear the floor pins.
If the front hooks
are not attached
correctly, the seat’s
rear hooks will
not attach to the rear
set of floor pins.
3. Firmly push the rear seat hooks into the rear
floor pins by pushing down the rear of the seat.
If the front hooks are not attaching correctly,
check that the seat is in the full rear position.
21
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Check that the seat is locked by trying to
raise the seat.
5. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback, to raise the seatback to the upright
position.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
that it is locked.
22
Captain Chairs
Your vehicle may have second row captain chairs.
If so, they can be adjusted forward or rearward
and the seatbacks can be adjusted.
Adjusting the Captain Chairs Forward
and Rearward
There are two manual adjustment bars on each
seat. One is located under the front of the
seat cushion. The other one is located under the
rear of the seat cushion.
Lift up either bar to slide the seat forward or
rearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into place.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner
lever located on the outboard side of the seat, then
move the seatback to the desired position.
To raise the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever
without applying pressure to the seatback.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
23
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To remove a captain chair, do the following:
To fold the seatback forward, lift up fully on the
recliner lever. Push the seatback forward until it
is flat.
The armrests can be lowered or raised for easier
entry or exit of the vehicle. If your vehicle has
captain chairs with side impact airbags, they will
have one armrest on the inboard side.
Removing a Captain Chair
(without a Side Impact Airbag)
If your vehicle has captain chairs with side impact
airbags, the seats cannot be removed. See
Where Are the Airbags? on page 86 for more
information.
24
1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to release
the rear hooks from the floor pins.
Installing a Captain Chair
(without a Side Impact Airbag)
{CAUTION:
2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor
pins and removed from the vehicle.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not put the seats in so they face rearward
because they will not latch that way. For the
second row, if you want more storage room behind
the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.
Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright
position, the seat belts are on the correct side of
the seats and the seats are in the full rear position
before beginning this procedure.
25
To install a captain chair, do the following:
1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.
26
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the
rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
Folding the Seatback(s)
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is
properly attached.
Third Row Seat
Your vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a full
bench seat and may come with hideaway rear
storage bins. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins on
page 174 for more information. The third row
seat can be removed and replaced, or with the
seatback folded, it will lie flat with the hideaway
rear storage bins.
To fold down either side of the 50/50 split
bench seat, pull up on the lever located on the
back of the seat you want to fold, and push
the seatback down.
27
Returning the Seatback to an Upright
Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Move the second row seat completely forward
by using the manual adjustment bar under
either the front or rear of the seat cushion.
2. Open the liftgate.
28
3. From the rear of the vehicle, locate the
pullstrap attached to the lever on the back of
the seat and pull it to raise the seat.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure that it
is locked into the upright position.
Removing the Third Row Seat
1. Remove the hideaway rear storage bins, if
equipped. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
on page 174 for more information.
2. Make sure all items are off the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
3. Put the seatback in its folded position before
removing the seat. See “Folding the Seatback”
previously.
4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release
handle until the pin indicators are fully out.
This indicates that the rear latches are
released from the floor. For ease of removing
the seat, squeeze the handle with the palm
of your hand up.
5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensure
the latches are clear of the floor pins.
6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle.
The release handle can be used to carry
the seat.
29
Installing the Third Row Seat
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not put the third row seat in so it faces
rearward because it will not latch that way. The
seat has to go in before the hideaway rear storage
bins. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins on
page 174 for more information.
30
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in the
folded position before beginning this procedure.
1. From the rear of the vehicle, place the
front hooks of the seat onto the front floor pins
in the third row. To do this, the seat will
need to be angled approximately 8-10 inches
(20–25 cm) from the floor so the front
hooks clear the rear floor pins and rear floor
cups. Use the release handle to guide the seat
into place.
If the front hooks are not attached correctly,
the rear latches will not attach to the rear set of
floor pins.
2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floor
pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
locked down. The indicator pins will no
longer stick out when the seat is properly
latched into place.
4. Return the seatback to its upright position.
See “Returning the Seatback to an Upright
Position” earlier in this section.
31
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
32
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 222 and
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on
page 222.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
33
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
34
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
35
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
36
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every
airbag system ever offered for sale has
required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have
to buckle up to get the most protection. That
is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
37
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
This part is only for people of adult size.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 56 or Infants and Young
Children on page 59. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
38
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 55.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 47.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
39
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
40
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
41
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
42
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
43
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the
belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
44
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.
45
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
46
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioning
of the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, push
down on the button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can
move the height
adjuster up by pushing
up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing
the button down to make sure it has locked into
position.
47
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 38.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
48
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
49
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 55.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
50
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
51
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each second row passenger
position. If your vehicle has a third row, there is
one guide for each outboard position. Here is how
to install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
52
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
53
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 49. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into the
storage pocket.
54
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts. They help the safety
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 102.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
55
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It
should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
56
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
{CAUTION:
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. If the child is sitting in a center
rear seat position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts
provide. If the child is sitting in a rear outboard
position, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides on page 52.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
57
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
58
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
59
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
60
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
61
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children with special
needs.
62
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
63
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
64
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
65
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
66
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 69 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
67
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
CAUTION:
68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The following explains how to attach a child
restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
69
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
70
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to be
attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a top tether.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Third Row
Second Row
Each seating position
with lower anchors has
two labels, near the
crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion, showing
where the anchors
are located.
71
For the second row seating positions, the top
tether anchors are located on the seatback, near
the base of each seat. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
For the center third row position, if your vehicle
has one, the top tether anchor is located on
the seatback, near the center of the third row
seating position. This anchor can accommodate
only one top tether.
Third Row
Second Row
72
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or in the third row outboard
positions, if your vehicle has one, if a national
or local law requires that the top tether be
attached, or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached. There is no place to attach the top tether
in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 67
for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
73
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
74
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
75
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the head
restraint.
76
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, raise the
head restraint and route
the tether under the
head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 69.
For vehicles with a third row, there are no top
tether anchors in the outboard seating positions.
Do not secure a child seat in these positions
if a national or local law requires that the top tether
be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
77
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
78
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 69.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer
place to secure a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 67.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) when
an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 93 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 224 for more information on
this including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
79
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
80
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 69.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 69 if
the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 93. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag or airbags are off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s airbag or
airbags, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to RUN or
START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 224.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
81
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
82
8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.
Side impact airbags are available for the driver, the
right front passenger and the second row
captain’s chairs (if equipped).
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on
the side of the seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the
risk of injury from the force of an inflating
frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job and comply with federal
regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your retailer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
83
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
84
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 56 or Infants and Young Children on
page 59.
85
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 223 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
86
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the
driver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatback
closest to the door.
87
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the
right front passenger and/or the second row
captain’s chairs (if equipped), it is in the side of
the seatback closest to the door.
88
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat
covers block the inflation path of a side
impact airbag.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But
they are designed to inflate only if the impact
exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold.
Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate
and help restrain the occupants. Whether your
frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based
on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,
these airbags inflate at a level less than full
deployment. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of
your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does
not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph
(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for
a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph
(29 to 40.2 km/h). The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it
can be somewhat above or below this range.
89
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front
passenger) are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side
impacts.
90
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact
airbags. See Airbag System on page 83.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or
rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of
the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside
the steering wheel and instrument panel. For
seating positions with side impact airbags, there
are also airbag modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
91
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
frontal airbag, the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, and for
seating positions with side impact airbags, the side
of the seatback closest to the door — may be
hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on when
the airbags inflate and turn on the hazard warning
flashers. You can lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers on
by using the controls for those features.
92
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
they inflate, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 547.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work properly. See
your retailer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to RUN or START.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 224.
93
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags or the second row
side impact airbags (if equipped) are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s airbag or airbags
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
94
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
95
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s airbag or airbags, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag or airbags are off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
on page 79.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
96
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
airbag or airbags anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag or
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s airbag or airbags,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag or airbags.
97
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 223 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
98
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 100 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 553.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition
key is turned off and the battery is
disconnected, an airbag can still inflate
during improper service. You can be
injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be
sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
99
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 538.
100
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
the instrument panel, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system. If
you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 538.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 504.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on a
seatback, the airbag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module in
the steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both the
airbag module and the seatback for seating
positions with a side impact airbag
(if equipped.) Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a
belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
101
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
102
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 223.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 105
Remote Keyless Entry System .................. 106
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation ............................................... 107
Doors and Locks ........................................ 114
Door Locks ................................................ 114
Power Door Locks ..................................... 116
Delayed Locking ........................................ 116
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 117
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 118
Lockout Protection ..................................... 118
Dual Sliding Doors .................................... 118
Power Sliding Door (PSD) ......................... 121
Liftgate ...................................................... 128
Windows ...................................................... 130
Power Windows ........................................ 131
Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................. 131
Power Rear Quarter Windows ................... 132
Sun Visors ................................................ 132
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 133
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 133
PASS-Key® III ........................................... 135
PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 136
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 138
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 138
Ignition Positions ....................................... 138
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 139
Starting the Engine .................................... 140
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 141
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 143
Parking Brake ........................................... 147
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 148
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 149
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 150
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 151
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 152
103
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 153
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 153
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 153
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 154
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 154
OnStar® System .......................................... 154
Universal Home Remote System ................ 156
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 156
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 157
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 158
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 163
104
Storage Areas ............................................. 167
Glove Box ................................................. 167
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 167
Overhead Console (With Rail) ................... 168
Overhead Console (Without Rail) ............... 170
Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 170
Folding Tray .............................................. 170
Second Row Center Console .................... 171
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 172
Convenience Net (With Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins) ................................ 173
Convenience Net (Without Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins) ................................ 173
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ..................... 174
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
105
This vehicle has a double sided key for the
ignition and the driver’s door lock.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft
system. The key has a transponder in the key
head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s
steering column. If a replacement key or
any additional key is needed, you must purchase
this key from your retailer. The key will have
PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
retailer if you need a new key made.
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key®
III on page 135 for more information on
programming your new key.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program on page 543
for more information.
106
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range.
This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you
have to stand closer to your vehicle for the
transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement
is necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 107.
• If you are still having trouble, see your retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors and
the liftgate using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
The remote keyless
entry transmitter shown
here is for a vehicle
equipped with the
remote vehicle start
feature and dual power
sliding doors.
107
The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle will only contain the buttons specific
to your vehicle’s factory installed remote
system features.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
this feature, you can start the engine from outside
the vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at the
end of this section for more detailed information.
Q (Lock): To lock all doors and the liftgate,
press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Power Door Locks on page 116
for more details on the power door lock features.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, the remote keyless entry transmitter’s lock
button may arm the system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 133 for more details.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps may
flash to let you know the command has been
received. If you press the lock button again, within
five seconds, the horn will sound and the turn
signal lamps may flash to let you know the vehicle
is already locked. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
Only) on page 261 for additional information.
108
" (Unlock): When you press unlock on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s
door will unlock. If you press unlock again
within five seconds, all the doors and the liftgate
will unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlock
the first time you press unlock, see “FOB
UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter will disarm the system. See
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 133 for more
details.
When you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock your vehicle the turn signal
lamps will flash to let you know the command was
received.
L (Remote Alarm): When you press the horn
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound.
This will allow you to attract attention, if needed.
Press this button again to stop the alarm from
sounding.
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation
+ (Power Sliding Door): If your vehicle
has one power sliding door, the remote keyless
entry transmitter will have a button with a van
symbol on it. Press and hold this button to open or
close the power sliding door. See Power Sliding
Door (PSD) on page 121.
*+ (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If your
vehicle has dual power sliding doors, your remote
keyless entry transmitter will have two buttons
that have a van symbol on them. The van symbol
on the left is for the driver’s side sliding door
and the van symbol on the right is for the
passenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold the
passenger’s or driver’s side button, with the
van symbol on it, to open or close the selected
power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 121.
You can operate the power sliding door(s) with
the remote keyless entry transmitter even if
the power sliding door override switch(es), on the
overhead console, are active or inactive. See
Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 121 for
additional information.
If the sliding door is closed and the power sliding
door button on the transmitter is pressed and
held, the vehicle’s doors will unlock and then the
power sliding door will open. If the power
sliding door has been locked using the manual
door lock lever, you will need to unlock the power
sliding door before it can be opened with the
keyless entry transmitter sliding door button.
If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened,
the driver’s side power sliding door will not open
completely. Do not try to force the door. Once
the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding
door can be opened normally.
109
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your
retailer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your retailer.
When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
retailer has coded the new transmitter, the
lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
See your retailer to match transmitters to
another vehicle.
110
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter
will not work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works, it is probably time to change
the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from
your body transferred to these surfaces may
damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the
slot on the side of the transmitter and twist it
to separate the halves.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle. It may also turn the rear
window defogger if the outside temperature is
below 45°F (7°C).
Laws in some local communities may restrict the
use of remote starters. For example, some
laws may require a person using remote start to
have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check
local regulations for any requirements on remote
starting of vehicles.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.
Do not use the metal flanges to pop out the
battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the
halves are snapped together tightly so water
will not get in.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
for seven seconds to synchronize the
transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
the remote vehicle start feature, the remote
keyless entry transmitter will have a button with
this symbol on it.
An increased range of operation is provided with
the remote keyless entry transmitter that has
the remote vehicle start button.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the
remote start feature. The vehicle may run out of
fuel. The vehicle may also run out of fuel if
the vehicle is running for a long period of time
when parked on an incline facing downward with
a low fuel condition.
111
To start the engine using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped with the remote vehicle start
button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the remote vehicle start button until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for at
least two seconds, if the vehicle’s lights are
not visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on while the
engine is running.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to RUN.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
112
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the
first 10 minutes will immediately expire and
the second 10 minute time frame will start.
After two remote starts have been provided
, the vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to
RUN and then back to LOCK using the key before
the remote start procedure can be used again.
If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,
and the engine is running, insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn it to the RUN position
to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote
start, do any of the following:
• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at
the vehicle and press the remote start
button until the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to RUN and then back
to LOCK.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The remote start system is disabled. See
“REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are
not closed.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system
malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided. The maximum number of remote
starts or remote start attempts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start
ready feature. This feature allows your retailer
to add the manufacturer’s remote vehicle
start feature.
If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)
symbol on the back cover, your vehicle has
the remote start ready feature. You can lock
or unlock your vehicle from approximately
197 feet (60 m) away.
See your retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
113
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of
a moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
114
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with
the key, insert the key and turn it toward the
front of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from
the outside with your key, insert the key and
turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has power door locks, you may be
able to unlock all of the doors and the liftgate
when you insert the key, turn it toward the front
of the vehicle, and hold it there for one second.
You may be able to lock all of the doors when you
insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
From the inside, use the manual or power door
locks.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull
back on the manual lever. To lock either front door
from the inside, push the manual lever forward.
115
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle has power door locks.
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all doors have been closed for
approximately five seconds.
The switches are
located on the driver’s
and front passenger’s
door. Press the top
of the switch to unlock
the doors and liftgate.
With the content theft-deterrent system, the
power door lock switch will not unlock the doors
until the system is disarmed. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 133 for more details.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doors
and liftgate. With the content theft-deterrent
system, the power door lock switch may cause the
system to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 133 for more details.
116
To activate the delayed locking feature, do one of
the following:
• Press the driver’s door power lock switch one
time while the driver’s door is open.
• Press the passenger’s door power lock switch
one time while the passenger’s door is open.
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter one time while any door
is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed
locking is active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating
any of the above actions more than one time.
If a door remains open, without any other door
being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after
approximately 45 seconds.
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors.
To turn the delayed locking feature off or on,
see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)
on page 261.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
If either sliding door is open when you use the
power door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding
door that is open will not lock. Normally the
delayed locking feature will be used to lock the
sliding door after it has been closed.
Automatic Door Lock
All of the doors will lock automatically when you
move the shift lever out of PARK (P). This feature
cannot be disabled.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle while
it is not in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or,
have that person use the manual lever or
the power door lock switch. When the door is
closed again, it will lock when the vehicle exceeds
5 mph (8 km/h).
With automatic door locks, you can lock or unlock
the doors at any time, either manually or by
using the power door lock switches.
The sliding door delayed locking feature will lock
your sliding door(s) in situations where the delayed
locking feature does not apply or was overridden
or programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking”
earlier in this section. Shortly after the last
sliding door is closed, all the doors will lock.
117
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
Your vehicle was programmed so that all doors
will unlock automatically when the shift lever
is moved into PARK (P).
To change the way the automatic door unlocking
operates, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) on page 261.
Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it more
difficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s
door is open while the key is in the ignition, the
door cannot be locked with the power door
lock switch.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never
be locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not
left in the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is
used, the key could still be locked inside the
vehicle. Always remember to take the key
with you.
118
Dual Sliding Doors
To open either sliding door from outside the
vehicle, pull the handle out and then pull the door
toward the rear. If you slide the door all the
way back, the door will rest in a detent position.
To move the door forward, you must first pull
the door past the open detent position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open
only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever
happens, do not try to force the sliding door. Just
close the driver’s side sliding door. Then when
the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding
door can be opened normally.
Sliding Door Lock
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward on
a steep grade (15 percent or more),
the door may not stay open and could
slam shut, possibly injuring someone.
To make sure the door does not slam
shut be sure to hold it open until
everyone is clear of the door, and only
then allow it to slowly close.
119
Sliding Door Security Lock
Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle
by moving the manual lever down. Unlock it
by moving the lever up.
With the power door locks, the sliding door lock
has a delay feature. See Delayed Locking on
page 116 and DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) on page 261.
Your vehicle is equipped with sliding door security
locks that helps prevent young children or other
passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using
the inside door handle. To use one of these
locks, do the following:
1. Open the sliding door.
2. On the inside of the
sliding door(s), on
the front edge of the
door will be a lock.
Push the lever up to
engage the lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
120
If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you can
prevent power opening of the sliding door from
the passenger power sliding door (psd) activation
switch by pressing the psd second row passenger
override (deactivation) switch located on the
overhead console. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 121.
If you want to open the sliding door while the
security lock is on, unlock and open the door from
the outside.
You should let adults and older children know how
the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.
If you do not, adults or older children who ride in the
rear will not be able to open the sliding door from
the inside while the security lock feature is in use.
Canceling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
Power Sliding Door (PSD)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can open
and close the power sliding door(s) using
the switches inside your vehicle. You can also
operate the sliding door(s) with your remote
keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry System on page 106.
{CAUTION:
Leaving your children or pets unattended
in your vehicle can be dangerous. They
could operate the power sliding door.
A child or others could be injured. Do not
leave children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door
from the outside.
2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
121
Power Sliding Door (PSD) Switches
If your vehicle has dual
power sliding doors, you
have these switches.
Your vehicle will have one of the following
switch(es) located on the overhead console
switchbank.
If your vehicle has a
single power sliding
door (PSD), you
have this switch.
Driver’s Side and
Passenger’s Side PSD
Activation/Override
(Deactivation) Switches
Your vehicle also
has passenger power
sliding door activation
switch(es).
PSD Activation/Override
(Deactivation) Switch
Passenger PSD
Activation Switch
122
If you have a single PSD, this switch is located in
front of the passenger side sliding door. If your
vehicle has dual PSDs, the switches are located in
front of both sliding doors.
Power Sliding Door Operation
The power sliding door(s) will only open if the
transaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not
have to be in PARK (P) to close the door(s).
There are several ways to open and close the
power sliding door(s).
• If your vehicle has a single power sliding door,
press the top of the overhead console PSD
activation/override (deactivation) switch.
• If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors,
press the top of the driver’s side and/or
passenger’s side overhead console PSD
activation/override (deactivation) switch.
• Press the passenger PSD activation switch.
This switch will also stop a moving door
immediately.
• Press the power sliding door button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• To manually open the power sliding door(s)
while the switch(es) are in the activation
position, pull and release the inside or outside
door handle to release the door latch. The
door will fully open.
• To manually close the power sliding door(s)
while the switches are in the activation
position, pull the inside or outside door handle
or the edge of the door. Move the door
about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed
position and release it. The door will close
completely and latch.
If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot be
unlocked and opened using the overhead console
PSD switch(es) or the passenger PSD activation
switch(es). The power sliding door must either
be manually unlocked or unlocked using the power
door unlock switch located on the driver’s or
front passenger’s armrest, and then opened using
the overhead or passenger PSD activation
switch(es).
123
The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be
used to open the power sliding door(s). If the
vehicle is locked, press the power sliding
door button(s) and all doors will unlock and the
sliding door(s) will open. See Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 107.
If the power sliding door has been manually locked,
you must unlock the PSD before it can be opened.
Notice: If you leave the power sliding door on
when you go through an automatic car
wash, the door may accidentally open. Be sure
the power sliding door is turned off when
going through a car wash.
If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the
process of closing when you shift out of PARK (P),
a chime will sound. This is a warning that the
sliding door(s) is not completely closed. Also, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate if
the door is open. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 241. Stop the vehicle and
close the door.
124
{CAUTION:
If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P)
and accelerate before the power sliding
door latches closed, the door may reverse
to the open position. A child or others
could fall out of the vehicle and be
injured. Always make sure the power
sliding door is closed and latched before
you drive away.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open
only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever
happens, do not try to force the sliding door. When
the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side
sliding door can be opened normally.
{CAUTION:
You or others could be injured if caught in
the path of the sliding door. Make sure the
door path is clear before closing the door.
If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s) while
it is closing, the door will automatically reverse to
the open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the
force of the closing door, or stronger. The force of
the closing door increases significantly as the door
approaches the latched position.
125
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward on a
steep grade (15 percent or more), the door
may not stay open and could slam shut,
possibly injuring someone. To make sure
the door does not slam shut, turn on the
power sliding door feature. Then if the
door closes, it will close under the control
of the power door system.
Power Sliding Door Second Row
Passenger Override (Deactivation)
To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding
door(s) by using the passenger PSD activation
switch, press the override (deactivation) part of the
overhead console switch. The door can still be
manually opened from the inside or outside
with the override (deactivation) on.
To open a power sliding door(s) manually when
the overhead console switch is in override
(deactivation) position, pull the inside or outside
door handle and slide the door all the way back.
126
To close the door(s) manually when the override
switch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position,
pull the inside or outside door handle and slide
the door all the way forward to the latched position.
To stop the door(s) immediately while the
door(s) is opening or closing, press the PSD
override (deactivation) part of the switch.
Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keyless
entry will open and close the door unless the
door has been manually locked using the
mechanical slider.
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or
not at all because of the following conditions:
• A low voltage or dead battery
• A disconnected battery
• If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21,
LHPSD/fuse 24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 are
removed or blown.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding
door may need to be reset. If your vehicle has
the dual power sliding doors, both doors will have
to be reset. To reset a door, do the following:
1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is
unlocked and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If the power sliding door overhead console
switch is in the override (deactivation)
position, return to the activation position.
4. Open the sliding door using the remote
keyless entry transmitter, overhead console
switch, or passenger switch. Allow the door to
travel fully open.
If the door does not travel to the fully open
position, press the overhead console switch to the
override (deactivation) position and slide the
door fully open and closed. Check for foreign
objects in the tracks. Repeat the procedure starting
with Step 1. If the door resists travel to the fully
open position, see your retailer for service.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 512 for
more information.
127
Liftgate
To unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, use
the remote keyless entry transmitter. For more
information, see Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 107.
You can also use the power door lock switch to
lock and unlock the liftgate.
Open the liftgate using the handle located above
the license plate. Once slightly opened, the
liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the
vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear
cargo area.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without
checking for overhead obstructions such as a
garage door, you could break the liftgate
glass. Always check to make sure the area
above the liftgate is clear before opening it.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate open or
if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that
will force outside air into your vehicle.
CAUTION:
128
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
See Climate Control System on
page 205 or Dual Climate Control
System on page 209.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them
all the way. See Engine Exhaust
on page 151.
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle,
then firmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with the
liftgate open, even slightly.
129
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
130
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The switches on the
driver’s door armrest
control the front
windows when the
ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 139.
The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. The first position lowers the window
normally.
To activate the express-down feature, push the
AUTO switch all the way down to the second
position, then release it. The window will lower
completely. To stop the window from lowering all
the way, pull up on the front of the switch.
Manual Rear Quarter Windows
Your vehicle may have manual rear quarter
windows.
To open, pull the latch
forward to release it,
then swing the window
outward. Press the
center of the latch to
secure the window
in the open position.
To raise the window, pull up the front of the
switch.
To close, pull the center of the latch forward and
then close the latch. Press the center of the
latch to secure the window in the closed position.
131
Power Rear Quarter Windows
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter
windows.
This switch, located in
the overhead console
switchbank, is used
for opening and closing
the power rear
quarter windows.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active,
to use the power rear quarter windows. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 139.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount
and swing them to the side. The sun visors can
also slide along the rod to cover different areas of
the front window.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a visor vanity mirror. Pull
down the sun visor to access the vanity mirror.
Press the top of the switch to open the windows;
both windows will open. The windows will
continue to open as long as the switch is pressed,
until they are fully opened.
Press the bottom of the switch to close both
windows. The windows can be closed fully or
partially, depending on how long the switch
is pressed.
132
Lighted Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a lighted vanity mirror.
Pull down the sun visor and flip up the cover to
expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on
when you flip up the cover.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
A light located on top of your instrument panel,
near the center of the vehicle next to the
windshield, will flash slowly to let you know that
the system has been armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the
power door lock switch.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries
to enter the vehicle without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or a key, or turns
the ignition to RUN. The horn will sound and the
turn signal lamps will flash for up to two minutes.
133
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when the key is
removed from the ignition and you use the driver’s
power door lock switch, with the driver’s door
open or the passenger’s door power door
lock switch with the passenger’s door open to lock
the vehicle. If you would like to turn on power
door lock switch arming, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261.
When the security light flashes quickly the system
is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked, the security light will begin
flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed.
134
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm if the key is not in the
ignition and you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to lock the doors. The security light will
flash to let you know the system is arming. If
you press the transmitter’s lock button twice within
five seconds, the horn will sound. After all doors
and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security
light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let
you know the system is armed.
Arming with Your Key
Your alarm system will arm when you use your
key to lock the driver’s door. The security light will
flash to let you know the system is arming.
After all doors and the liftgate are closed and
locked, the security light will begin flashing at a
very slow rate to let you know the system is
armed. If you would like your key not to arm the
system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) on page 261.
Arming Confirmation
PASS-Key® III
If remote unlock confirmation is on, the turn
signal lamps will flash briefly to let you know
when your alarm system has disarmed. If
you would not like the turn signal lamps to flash,
see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)
on page 261.
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder
in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the
doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you
know the system is no longer armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use
your key to unlock the driver’s door. The security
light will stop flashing to let you know the
system is no longer armed. If you would like your
key not to disarm the alarm system, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261.
135
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized
Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III
is a passive theft
deterrent system.
This means you do not have to do anything
different to arm or disarm the system. It works
when you insert or remove the key from the
ignition.
136
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down
the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter
will not work and fuel will stop being delivered
to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error
method to start the vehicle will be discouraged
because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security
message comes on, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
instrument panel PASS KEY fuse. If the engine
still does not start with the other key, your vehicle
needs service. If your vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your retailer or
a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key® III to
have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 512.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder
to learn the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for
learning additional keys only. If all the currently
programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you
must see your retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III to have keys made
and programmed to the system.
See your retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that is
cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the
system.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed
key into the ignition lock cylinder and start the
engine. If the engine will not start, see your
retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it
to RUN within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
5. The security message will turn off once the
key has been programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security message went on
due to how quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security message
comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III
system, however, is not working properly and must
be serviced by your retailer. Your vehicle is not
protected by the PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see
your retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
137
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
Ignition Positions
The key can be turned to one of four positions
while in the ignition switch.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better
in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 398 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
138
A (LOCK): This is the only position from which
you can remove the key. This position locks
your ignition and transaxle.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the electrical accessories, such
as the radio.
C (RUN): This is the position to which the switch
returns after the engine is started and the
ignition key is released. This is the position for
driving. Even while the engine is not running,
RUN can be used to operate your electrical
accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the
key in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the ignition key.
The switch will return to RUN for driving.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside,
as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves.
If you leave the key in the ignition and park your
vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open
the driver’s door. Always remember to remove
your key from the ignition and take it with you.
This will lock your ignition and transaxle.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the
key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after
it has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, your power windows and the audio
system will continue to work for up to 10 minutes
after the engine is turned off or until either
door is opened. If a door is opened, the power
windows and audio system will shut off.
139
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position — that is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the
vehicle moving could damage the transaxle.
Shift into PARK (P) only when your vehicle
is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
turn your ignition key to START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle
speed will go down as your engine warms
up. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
140
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects the electrical
system. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking until the vehicle starts or
until it exceeds the maximum cranking
time allowed, approximately 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
starter-motor gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already
running. The engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or LOCK position.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your
battery to be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter motor.
Wait about 15 seconds between each try to
help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,
push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter
of the way down while you turn the key to
START. Do this until the engine starts.
As soon as it does, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but
then stops, it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for
a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start, or starts briefly but then
stops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on
the temperature. When the engine starts,
release the key and the accelerator pedal.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required. Your vehicle may also have an internal
thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)
as noted on the cord.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your Saturn retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
141
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The electrical cord is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
142
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The retailer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and psh the shift lever all the way
info PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
on page 149.
{CAUTION:
Maximum engine speed is limited when you are in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for your
shift lever.
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front
wheels. It is the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle
can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 148. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 398.
143
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
144
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding
under Loss of Control on page 374
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up
rather slowly or not shift gears when you go
faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle
that way, you could damage the transaxle.
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can
drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for
higher speeds until then.
Warm-Up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when
the outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder.
You may notice that the transaxle will shift at
a higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmed
up. This is a normal condition designed to
provide heat to the passenger compartment and
defrost the windows more quickly. See Climate
Control System on page 205 and Dual Climate
Control System on page 209 for more information.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing
a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
145
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,
shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above
65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive in
THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up
rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears
as you go faster, something may be wrong with
a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very
far that way, your vehicle can be damaged.
So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced
right away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
146
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transaxle will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.
If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push down on
the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot while
you push down on the parking brake pedal with
your left foot. When you lift your left foot from the
parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the
released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 398.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 226.
147
Shifting Into Park (P)
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 398.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling
the shift lever toward you and moving it up as
far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
148
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find
it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
This is called torque lock. To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 148.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in
PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK
position. In addition, you must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 143.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
149
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
150
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
151
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 151.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is
at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park
in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 386.
152
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 148.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 398.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move
it up or down and side to side. The day/night
adjustment can lessen glare from the headlamps
behind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward for
daytime use; push it back for night use.
Outside Power Mirrors
Push the top control to the left or right to choose
either the driver’s or passenger’s outside
rearview mirror. Leave the control in the center
position to prevent moving the mirrors once
they are adjusted.
Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust the
position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror so
that you can see the side of your vehicle and the
area behind it, while sitting in a comfortable
driving position.
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or
rearward to prevent damage when going through
car washes or confined spaces.
The controls, located
on the driver’s door,
operate both outside
rearview mirrors.
153
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things
appear farther away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If equipped, the outside heated rearview mirrors
are activated when the rear window defogger
is turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger”
in Climate Control System on page 205 or
Dual Climate Control System on page 209.
154
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal
to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the
Terms and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription
Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber Information packet located
in your vehicle. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the
Safe & Sound Plan is included for one year
from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections® Plan to meet your
needs. For more information, press the OnStar®
button to speak with an advisor.
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
•
•
•
•
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe & Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands at the touch of a button. Hands-Free
Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and
may be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages or
linked to a cell phone through OnStar® Shared
Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to the
OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
155
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a
feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses
your minutes to access weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the
phone button and giving a few simple voice
commands, you can browse through the various
topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
$: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact
with OnStar®.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 353
for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial
directory numbers, press this button once, wait for
the response, say the number(s) to be dialed,
wait for the number(s) to be repeated and then say
“dial.” See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more
information.
156
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides
a way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTE05A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides
a way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number
is 2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this equipment.
157
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the
steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming
the transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there are three round
Light Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions below. If there is one triangular LED
above the Universal Home Remote System
buttons, follow the instructions under Universal
Home Remote System Operation (with one
triangular LED).
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
158
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. You only need the
original remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that
upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of
the garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
If you do not know if your garage door opener
is a fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
159
Example of Switch Settings
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
160
Example
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and one-half
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
Universal Home Remote System. Push
one button for each switch as follows:
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like
to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light
above the selected button should slowly
blink. You may need to hold the button
from five to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing
a different function button in Step 7 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
Follow these steps to program up to
three channels:
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
161
3. Press and hold the button you would like
to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light,
above the selected button, should slowly
blink. You may need to hold the button
from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
After pressing the “learn” button, you have
10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit.
If you cannot locate the “learn” button, refer
to the owners guide for your garage door
opener.
162
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons
by repeating the instructions.
Universal Home
Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED)
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lights, located directly
above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 542.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With three round LED).
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop
and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
163
If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to
complete the programming of your Universal Home
Remote Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 538.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of
the garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
164
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to
three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to
complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door opener.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release. Repeat
the press/hold/release sequence a second
time, and depending on the brand of the
garage door opener, or other rolling code
device, repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1, as this will erase all
previous programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.
165
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
166
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the
train (learning) mode and can be programmed
at any time beginning with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they
can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 538.
Storage Areas
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store
many items. If the vehicle has an extended
wheelbase, it can carry even larger items. The
floor pins that are used to attach the seats,
can be used to secure larger loads.
Glove Box
If the glove box has a lock, put your key into
the lock and turn the key counterclockwise.
To open the glove box, pull the latch release.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent
the door from lowering too far. Open the glove
box until the door is partway open, then pull
the door down if you need it fully opened.
To close the glove box, the door must be pushed
up past the detent. To lock the glove box, put
your key into the lock and turn the key clockwise.
Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located below the center
instrument panel switchbank. The cupholders
have a rubber liner that can be removed, so
that larger cups can fit into the cupholders.
You can also remove the liner to clean it.
To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Push
the tray back when not in use.
Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders
in the second row.
167
Overhead Console (With Rail)
Storage Bin
If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead
console, it may contain the following:
• Reading lamps. See Front Reading Lamps
on page 197 or Rear Reading Lamps
on page 197.
• Switchbank. See Overhead Console
Switchbank on page 200.
• OnStar® System buttons. See OnStar®
System on page 154.
• Universal Home Remote buttons.
See Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) on page 156
or Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) on page 157.
Your vehicle may have a storage bin located on
the overhead rail that you can use for storage.
See your retailer to purchase additional items
for the rail system.
If your bin is equipped with the finger size latches
do the following:
1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the
desired location.
2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting
it with one hand.
3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it
90 degrees.
168
4. Firmly press down making sure the latch is
flat with the ribs (A) on the storage bin.
5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4 for
the latch on the opposite side of the storage bin.
6. Reverse these steps in order to remove the
storage bin.
If your bin is equipped with the hand size latches
do the following:
1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the
desired location.
2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting
it with one hand.
3. The bin will snap into place.
4. To remove the bin, support the bin with
one hand while pulling each latch up and away
from the bin.
The contents of the bin should never weigh more
than 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg).
Always make sure to close and latch the bin
before driving.
169
Overhead Console (Without Rail)
If your vehicle has an overhead console without
the rail system, it has two reading lights, a
courtesy light, and a switchbank. See Overhead
Console Switchbank on page 200 for more
information.
Floor Console Storage Area
If your vehicle has a storage compartment located
on the front console below the front cupholders.
Pull up and then forward on the handle to open
the storage compartment.
170
Folding Tray
Your vehicle may be
equipped with folding
convenience trays
located between seats.
To use each tray lift up
on the handle located
on its front end, while
pulling up on the tray to
lock it into place. There
are four cupholders on
each tray.
Second Row Center Console
If your vehicle has the second row center console,
use the following procedure to remove or install
the console.
Removing the Center Console
1. Locate the attachment lever in an opening
on the rear of the console
2. Pull the attachment lever upward to release
the attachment hook.
3. Lift the console up to remove it from the
vehicle.
Replacing the Center Console
{CAUTION:
A second row center console that is
not locked into place properly can move
around in a crash or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured.
Be sure to lock the console into place
properly when installing it.
1. Position the second row center console above
the forward floor attachments between the
second row bucket seats.
For information on installing the seats, see
Rear Seat Operation on page 14.
2. Place the console’s front hooks onto the
forward floor attachments.
3. Locate the attachment lever at the rear of the
console and pull up.
4. Rock the rear attachment bracket onto the
floor attachment and release the lever.
5. Pull up on the console to ensure the rear
attachment hook is latched.
171
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
172
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not
standard on this vehicle and must be purchased
at your retailer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so
that it rests on the slats as far forward
as possible and against the side rails, making
sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 391.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you
are driving, check now and then to make sure
the cargo is still securely fastened.
Convenience Net (With Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins)
Convenience Net (Without Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net.
The convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, from falling out of the vehicle
when the liftgate is opened. Install the convenience
net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net.
The convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, like grocery bags, from falling
over. Install the convenience net at the rear of
your vehicle, inside the liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label on the
net should be in the upper left corner.
2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rear
edge of the rear hideaway rear storage bins.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label on
the net should be in the upper left corner.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings
on the floor.
3. Once you have loaded items into the net,
stretch the higher side of the net up and over
the top of the load to hold it firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger,
heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your
vehicle, as far forward as you can.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take
down the convenience net to extend the life of the
net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep
the rear exit clear.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take
down the convenience net to extend the life of
the net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep
the rear exit clear.
173
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is
not secured properly, it can move around
in a collision or sudden stop. People in
the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
secure any such item properly.
Your vehicle may have hideaway rear storage
bins. It provides extra storage space for the rear
of the vehicle.
To open the hideaway rear storage bins, pull up
on the door latch located on the front of the cover.
The hideaway rear storage bins cover has
two automatic prop rods to hold it up and in place.
To close the cover, you must pull one of the
prop rod linkages toward you while holding onto
the door latch and lower the cover to close it.
174
Removing the Hideaway Rear
Storage Bins
1. Make sure that all items are off the hideaway
rear storage bins and that they are empty.
2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of the
hideaway rear storage bins, counterclockwise
until the knob is loose.
3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pull
up on the hideaway rear storage bins to
remove them from the vehicle.
Replacing the Hideaway Rear
Storage Bins
1. Make sure the third row seat is properly
installed in the vehicle. See Third Row Seat
on page 27 for more information. If the
third row seat is not in the vehicle with the
hideaway rear storage bins, the hideaway
rear storage bins will not be locked into
the correct position in the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the hideaway rear storage
bins are empty and closed.
3. Lift the hideaway rear storage bins up and
into the rear of the vehicle.
4. Slide the hideaway rear storage bins in and
align it to the rear seat.
5. Press down on the front of the hideaway rear
storage bins so the center is aligned on the
sill mounting bracket.
6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.
7. Pull up on the hideaway rear storage bins
to make sure they are locked into place.
The cover of the hideaway rear storage bins can
be left in its upright position while the vehicle
is moving.
The hideaway rear storage bins and the third row
seat both have a maximum weight capacity of
400 lbs (181.6 kg).
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
175
✍ NOTES
176
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 180
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 182
Other Warning Devices ............................. 182
Horn .......................................................... 182
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 182
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 183
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 184
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 185
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 185
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 185
Windshield Washer .................................... 186
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 187
Cruise Control ........................................... 188
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 192
Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 193
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 193
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System .................. 193
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 195
Interior Lamps Control ............................... 195
Dome Lamp .............................................. 196
Entry Lighting ............................................ 196
Delayed Lighting ........................................ 196
Exit Lighting .............................................. 197
Front Reading Lamps ................................ 197
Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 197
Cargo Lamp .............................................. 198
Electric Power Management ...................... 198
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 199
Overhead Console Switchbank .................. 200
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 200
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 203
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current .... 204
Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 205
Climate Controls ......................................... 205
Climate Control System ............................. 205
Dual Climate Control System ..................... 209
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 212
Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 212
Rear Climate Control System
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 215
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 217
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 219
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 220
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 221
Trip Odometer ........................................... 221
Tachometer ............................................... 221
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 222
177
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 222
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 223
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 224
Charging System Light .............................. 226
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 226
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 227
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 228
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 228
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 229
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 232
Security Light ............................................ 232
Cruise Control Light .................................. 233
Highbeam On Light ................................... 233
Fuel Gage ................................................. 233
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 234
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 234
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 235
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..................... 240
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 241
DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) ........................................ 261
178
Audio System(s) ......................................... 270
Setting the Time ........................................ 272
Radio with CD ........................................... 272
Using an MP3 ........................................... 287
XM Radio Messages ................................. 293
Navigation/Radio System ........................... 294
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 294
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 309
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 325
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 328
Mobile Digital Media System ..................... 330
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 352
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 353
Radio Reception ........................................ 354
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 355
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 355
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 355
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 356
Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 356
✍ NOTES
179
Instrument Panel Overview
180
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 212.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 183.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 353.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 220.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (If
Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 234.
F. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped).
See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 365.
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 182.
H. Passenger Airbag Status And Passenger
Seatbelt Reminder Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 224 and
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on
page 222.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 270.
J. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 192.
K. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps
Control on page 195. Instrument Panel
Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 195.
L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
page 421.
M. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 147.
N. Horn. See Horn on page 182.
O. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See Cruise
Control on page 188.
P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 205. Dual Climate Controls. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 209.
Q. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). See
Heated Seats on page 10.
R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 167.
181
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
182
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering
wheel to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold
the wheel and pull the
lever. Then move
the wheel to a
comfortable position and
release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 184.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 185.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 185.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield
Wipers on page 185.
183
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 186.
• Z Rear Window Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 186.
• = Rear Window Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 186.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 192.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
184
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the
lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it
there until you complete your lane change. The
lever will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and
check the fuse. See Bulb Replacement on
page 455 and Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 512.
If you have a trailer towing option with added
wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will
flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb
is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal
lamps regularly to make sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver
know to turn it off. If you need to leave the signal
on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the
signal and then turn it back on.
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward
you to momentarily turn on the high beams.
This will signal that you are going to pass. When
you release the lever, they will turn off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever
away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light will
appear on the
instrument panel cluster.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the
band with the wiper symbol on it.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the
band to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start.
Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.
If you want more wipes, hold the band on mist
longer.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you.
N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a
long or short delay between wipes. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band
to choose the delay time. The closer to the top
of the lever, the shorter the delay.
185
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low
speed, turn the band away from you to the
first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings. To stop
the wipers, move the band to off.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If
your blades do become worn or damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold the
windshield washer paddle with this symbol on it
to wash your windshield. The washers and wipers
will operate.
When you release the paddle, the washers will
stop, and the wipers will continue to operate
for two cycles, unless your wipers had already
been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the
wiper speed you had selected earlier.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
186
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the rear washers/wipers off.
Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this position
to turn the rear wipers on.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
If your vehicle has the
rear window washer/
wiper, the controls are
located on the end of the
turn signal/multifunction
lever.
= (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to this
position to wash and wipe the rear window.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear
window washer will run out of fluid before
the windshield washer. If you can wash your
windshield but not your rear window, check the
fluid level.
187
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle has
cruise control, the lever
is located below the
windshield wiper control
on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever
up to resume the cruise control speed, or to
accelerate when passing another vehicle.
J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press the
button on the end of the lever to turn the cruise
control on. Press it again to turn cruise control off.
R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push the
lever down to set the cruise speed. If the cruise
speed is already set this position can be used
to coast or decelerate from a higher speed.
CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruise
control speed.
188
Cruise control allows a speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more to be maintained
without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This
is helpful on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 365. When road conditions allow, the
cruise control can be used again.
1. Push the button at the end of the cruise
control lever to turn the cruise control on.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Push down on the cruise control lever and
release it. This will set the speed in cruise
control.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
This symbol will appear
on the instrument panel
cluster when the
cruise control is set.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
This symbol will disappear when the brakes are
applied or the cruise control is cancelled. It will
reappear when the set cruise speed is resumed.
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
189
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and
then the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts
off. But the cruise control does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, the cruise control
lever can be pushed upward toward the plus
(resume/accelerate) position to return to the preset
cruise speed.
The vehicle will return to and stay at the preset
cruise speed. If the cruise control lever is pushed
up and held toward the plus (resume/accelerate)
position, the vehicle speed will increase until
the lever is released or the brakes are applied.
Do not continue to hold the lever in the plus
(resume/accelerate) position, unless a faster speed
is desired.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Push up on the cruise control lever
toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position,
then release the lever and take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Push up and hold the cruise control lever
toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position
until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Then release the cruise control lever. To
increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, push up briefly on the cruise control
lever and release it. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will speed up approximately
one mph (1.6 km/h).
The acceleration feature will only work after the
cruise control speed has been set by pushing the
cruise control lever down to the set position.
190
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed
while using cruise control:
• Push the cruise control lever downward
toward the minus (set/coast/decelerate)
position until a lower speed is reached, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
cruise control lever downward toward the
minus (set/coast/decelerate) position briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle will
slow down approximately one mph (1.6 km/h).
How well the cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and
the steepness of the hills. When going up
steep hills, the accelerator pedal might have to be
used in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, the brakes might have to be
applied, or the transaxle might have to be
shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Doing either of these things will take the
vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to
use the cruise control if the brakes constantly have
to be applied, or the vehicle continuously needs
to be shifted to a lower gear.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Cancelling Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control
speed set earlier.
To cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruise
control lever forward, or step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Doing either of these things will only end the
current cruise control session, but the set speed
will be retained in memory.
Push the button at the end of the cruise control
lever to turn the system off.
191
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned
off, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
The control to the left of
the steering column
operates the exterior
lamps.
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to
toggle off all lamps. This is a momentary control
that will spring back to AUTO when released.
This momentary control will turn the automatic
headlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps on
and off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, this is only true when the transaxle is in
PARK (P).
192
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to set your headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exterior
lamps on and off automatically depending on how
much light is available outside the vehicle.
Due to the momentary switch design, your
automatic lights may be disabled even if the
control is in the AUTO position.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
• Taillamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Headlamps on Reminder
This feature, if equipped, will automatically
activate the headlamps and parking lamps after
the windshield wipers have been in use for
about 30 seconds and when all of the following
conditions are met.
• The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
• The headlamps have not already been
activated by automatic lighting.
• The automatic lighting feature has not been
disabled using the exterior lamp control.
If you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime once
the driver’s door is opened.
See Exterior Lamps on page 192 for additional
information.
If the wipers are activated for over 30 seconds
and the exterior lamp control is in the parking
lamps position, or the automatic lighting feature
has been disabled using the exterior lamp control,
a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
appear on the Driver Information Center, if
equipped.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional Daytime Running Lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
193
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make front parking and
turn signal lamps come on in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal
lamps will be on. Your instrument panel will
not be lit up.
When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps
will come on automatically. When it is bright
enough outside, the exterior lamps will turn off and
the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still
turn on the headlamps any time you need to.
194
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will
take approximately 30 seconds for the automatic
headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make
sure your instrument panel brightness control is
in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 195.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp control
to off after starting the vehicle.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob to adjust the
instrument panel
brightness is located in
the center of the
interior lamp controls.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights and
counterclockwise to dim them.
Interior Lamps Control
The interior lamp control
is located to the right of
the exterior lamp
controls on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering
column.
R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outer
knob to this position to have your interior lamps
remain off while any door is open.
1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position to
turn the interior lamps on while any door is
open and when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition.
+ (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob to
this position to turn the interior lamps on.
Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panel
brightness, described earlier in this section.
195
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is located in the headliner and has
two buttons to manually turn it on or off. The dome
lamp will come on each time you open a door,
unless you turn on the interior lamps override
feature. See Interior Lamps Control on page 195.
Entry Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is
illuminated so that you can see inside before
you enter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for
20 seconds if you unlock your door using your
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
ignition is in LOCK. After 20 seconds have
passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The
lamps will turn off before the 20 seconds if you
do one of the following:
• Lock all the doors using the key.
• Press lock on the power door lock switch.
• Press lock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while
any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out
when all doors and the liftgate are closed.
196
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not
been locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 196.
To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see
DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)
on page 261.
Delayed Lighting
The delayed lighting feature will continue to
illuminate the interior for 20 seconds after all doors
have been closed, so that you can find your
ignition and buckle your safety belt at night.
Delayed lighting will not occur while the ignition is
in RUN or ACCESSORY. After 20 seconds
have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade
out. The lamps will fade out before the 20 seconds
have passed if you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Lock all doors using the power door lock
switch or the key.
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261.
Exit Lighting
Front Reading Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
for about 25 seconds whenever you remove
the key from the ignition. If you turn the ignition
key to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade
out. The lamps will also fade out if you lock the
doors with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
There are two reading lamps and one courtesy
lamp in the overhead console. To turn either
reading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp.
The courtesy lamp will come on each time you
open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps
override feature. See Interior Lamps Control on
page 195.
When any door is opened, exit lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while
any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out
when all doors and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to
20 seconds after all doors have been closed if
they have not been locked. See Delayed Lighting
on page 196.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261.
Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps in the third row
headliner. To turn either reading lamp on or off,
press the lens of the lamp.
There may also be a reading lamp in the second
row, integrated with the dome lamp. To turn
the second row reading lamp on or off, press the
button next to the lamp lens.
197
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your
vehicle, above the liftgate opening, and does not
have a switch. The cargo lamp will come on
each time you open a door, unless you turn on the
interior lamps override. See Interior Lamps
Control on page 195.
Electric Power Management
This vehicle has Electric Power Management
(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimates
the battery’s temperature and state of charge
and then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
198
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you may
see the voltage move up or down. This is normal.
If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Battery
Voltage Low. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you
from draining the battery, in case you accidentally
leave the interior lamps on. If you leave any
interior lamps on while the ignition is in lock or off,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
The lamps will not come back on again until
you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY
• Open a closed door, or close and reopen
a door.
• Turn the interior lamps on if they are in the
door or override position.
• Turn the interior lamps to the door or override
position and then to on again if the interior
lamp control is in the on position.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off
the lamps after only three minutes.
199
Overhead Console Switchbank
The overhead console switchbank is located in the
overhead console. This switchbank may include
the following:
• Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es).
See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 121.
• Power Rear Quarter Windows. See Power
Rear Quarter Windows on page 132.
• Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 200.
If your vehicle does not have some of these
options, there will be a blank.
200
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it is designed
to help you park, while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low
speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help
make parking easier and to help you avoid
colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The
URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet
(1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how close
these objects are from your rear bumper.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic
sensors located at the rear bumper are used to
detect the distance to the object. The URPA
display is located inside the vehicle, near the rear
window. It has three color-coded lights used to
provide distance and system information to
the driver.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
URPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.
URPA can be turned off
by pressing the rear
park aid disable switch
located in the
overhead console
switchbank.
While the system is disabled, an indicator light will
be lit on the switch. You will not see any lights
on the rear display if the switch is in the off
position.
201
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
REVERSE (R). When the system turns on,
the three lights on the display will illuminate for
one and a half seconds to let you know that
the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you that
the system does not work at speed greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed
of less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following
will occur:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet
(1.5 m) away.
202
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate
level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize
an object, it must be within detection range behind
the vehicle.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of
mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that
may affect system performance include things like
the vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck. If
after cleaning the rear bumper and then driving
forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display
continues to flash red, see your retailer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging
out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,
the light may also flash red. The light will continue
to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until your
vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)
without any obstructions behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
Vehicle on page 505.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with a front accessory
power outlet located near the floor on the
instrument panel. It can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone
or CB radio.
Pull the cover down to use the accessory power
outlet. When not in use, keep the cover on.
The rear accessory power outlet is located behind
the third row seats on the driver’s side behind
an access cover.
To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover
and pull it off. To put the cover back on, line up the
tabs at the back of the cover and put the cover
in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.
When not in use, always cover the rear
accessory power outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on
for extended periods will drain the battery.
Always turn off electrical equipment when not
in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem see your retailer for
additional information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
203
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be
used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment
with a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to
use equipment that requires more than the limit, a
protection circuit will cut the power supply. To
reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it back
in or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORY
and then back on. The power will automatically
restart when equipment that operates within
the limit is plugged in.
The power outlet is
located behind the
third row seats on
the passenger’s side
rear quarter trim panel.
204
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly
if these items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage
such as: compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,
touch sensor lamps, etc.
Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To use
the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way
and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out
by itself.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
205
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
Outside Air: This mode will be automatically
selected when your vehicle is in any mode except
maximum air conditioning.
206
A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.
The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning
compressor to operate.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the air temperature inside your
vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When it
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come
on to let you know that air conditioning is
activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):
Turn the right knob to this position for maximum air
conditioning. This will select air conditioning and
recirculation for maximum cooling of your
vehicle. This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. This mode will automatically be
selected when you select maximum air
conditioning.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
this mode, the system runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode.
( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on
the heated seats. The button on the left controls
the driver’s seat and the button on the right
controls the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats
on page 10 for additional information.
207
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air
to the windshield and the side window outlets,
with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this
mode, the system will automatically run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle has a rear window defogger a
warming grid is used to remove fog from the
rear window.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
208
The rear window defogger will turn off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
Dual Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a dual climate control
system. With this system you can control
the heating, cooling, and ventilation for your
vehicle.
Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and
passenger’s levers to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside your vehicle.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):
Turn the right knob to this position for maximum air
conditioning. This will select air conditioning and
recirculation for maximum cooling of your vehicle.
Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering
your vehicle or help heat or cool the air inside your
vehicle more quickly. This mode will automatically
be selected when maximum air conditioning is
selected.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.
The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning
compressor to operate.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
209
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
Outside Air: This mode is automatically selected
when your vehicle is in any mode except
maximum air conditioning.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them and switch to
maximum air conditioning mode. This helps to
reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to
cool down. It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on
the air conditioning system on or off. When it
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come
on to let you know that air conditioning is
activated.
210
the heated seats. The button on the left controls
the driver’s seat and the button on the right
controls the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats
on page 10 for additional information.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When this mode
is selected, the system runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically run the air
conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An
indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
211
Outlet Adjustment
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this position
to open the air outlets.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this position
to close the air outlets.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to
change the direction of the airflow.
Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have a rear climate control
system that allows the driver to adjust the
fan speed for the rear seating area. This system
works with the main climate control system in your
vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
212
This lever is located below the main climate
control system on the instrument panel. Use this
lever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passengers.
A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increase
or decrease airflow to the rear seating area.
Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.
AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rear
passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow
to the rear seating area.
Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control
system that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the temperature and fan speed for the rear
seating area.
When the front climate control is in AUX and the
rear climate control fan or temperature button
is pressed, the display will show the same airflow
modes as the front climate control system. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 209
The front control must be in AUX position to
enable adjustment of the temperature and fan
speed on the rear control system. If it is not
in AUX, pressing the fan or temperature button on
the rear climate control will show a DISABLED
message on the rear seat entertainment system
display.
t r (Decrease Setting): Press this button to
decrease the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
213
[ u (Increase Setting): Press this button to
Rear Air Outlets
increase the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in display.
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from
obstructions. Also, keep the area around the base
of the center instrument panel console, between
and under the front seats, free of objects that could
also obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.
9 (Fan): Press this button to increase or
decrease fan speed. After pressing this button,
arrows and a fan will appear in the display.
The arrows indicate that to increase or decrease
fan speed, you need to press either the left or right
arrow button. The displayed arrows and fan will
disappear after a few seconds.
b (Temperature): Press this button to increase
or decrease temperature. After pressing this
button, arrows and a temperature scale will appear
in the display. The arrows indicate that to
increase or decrease temperature, you need to
press either the left or right arrow button. The
displayed arrows and temperature scale will
disappear after a few seconds.
214
For more information on how to use the main
climate control system, see Dual Climate Control
System on page 209. For information on
ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 212.
Rear Climate Control System
(Option B, Uplevel)
AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rear
passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow
to the rear seating area.
Your vehicle may have a rear climate control
system that allows the driver to adjust the
fan speed for the rear seating area. This system
works with the main climate control system in your
vehicle.
Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control
system that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the temperature and fan speed for the rear
seating area.
This lever is located below the main climate
control system on the instrument panel. Use this
lever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passengers.
A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increase
or decrease airflow to the rear seating area.
Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.
When the front climate control is in AUX and the
rear climate control fan or temperature button
is pressed, the display will show the same airflow
modes as the front climate control system. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 209
The front control must be in AUX position to enable
adjustment of the temperature and fan speed on the
rear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing the
fan or temperature button on the rear climate
control will show a DISABLED message on the rear
seat entertainment system display.
215
q g (Decrease Setting): Press this button to
decrease the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
Pressing this button a third time will turn off the on
screen display.
QR: Press the up and down arrows to toggle
r l (Increase Setting): Press this button to
between the fan and temperature settings.
increase the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
Rear Air Outlets
9 (Fan)b (Temperature): Press this button once
to enable adjustment of the fan speed. After
pressing this button, the current fan speed setting
will be highlighted and appear in the on screen
display. The arrows indicate that to increase
or decrease fan speed, you need to press either
the left or right arrow button. The on screen display
will disappear after a few seconds.
Press this button twice to enable temperature
adjustment. After pressing this button, the current
temperature settings will be highlighted and
appear in the on screen display. The arrows
indicate that to increase or decrease temperature,
you need to press either the left or right arrow
button. The on screen display will disappear after
a few seconds.
216
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from
obstructions. Also, keep the area around the base
of the center instrument panel console, between
and under the front seats, free of objects that could
also obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.
For more information on how to use the main
climate control system, see Dual Climate Control
System on page 209. For information on
ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 212.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes most
particles from the air, including dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early. For how often to change
the air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on
page 522.
The access panel for the passenger compartment
air filter is located in the back of the glove box.
To replace the filter, do the following:
1. Pull the tab located on the outer access panel
up and out.
217
3. The first air filter will pull straight out. To
remove the second, reach in and slide it
toward the opening. Pull the second filter out.
4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make
sure the filters are inserted so that the sealing
foam is angled in the same direction on
both filters. For the type of filter to use, see
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 532.
5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing
the tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.
6. Snap the outer access panel into the back of
the glove box.
2. Then push the tab, located on the left of the
inner access panel, to the right.
218
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there’s a problem with your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and
gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few pages,
some warning lights come on briefly when you
start the engine just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should not be alarmed when this happens.
219
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive
safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
United States version shown, Canada similar
220
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. The new one can
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can display how far you have
driven since you last reset it.
For more information see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 235.
221
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in motion, the chime
and safety belt light will be repeated. You should
buckle your seat belt. If the driver’s belt is
already buckled, neither the chime nor the light
will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will come on for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if a passenger is
detected by the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 93 for more
information. The passenger safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
You should have the
passenger buckle their
safety belt.
This light and chime reminder will be repeated if
the ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, the
passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger
airbag is enabled.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
222
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light comes on if
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 83.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key
to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is
a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
223
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag
Status
Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
side impact airbag (if equipped).
224
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped). A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s airbag or airbags. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 93 for more
on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of an airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 223.
225
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show you
it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it
stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the charging system.
It could indicate that you have problems with a
generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set your parking
brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake
doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means you have
a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
United States
226
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 227 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 396.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Your vehicle has an
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) warning light.
{CAUTION:
This light should come on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
If this light stays on longer than normal after you
have started your engine, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on and stays on when you are
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, the ABS needs service
and you do not have anti-lock brakes.
227
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a traction control
system warning light.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn
off and the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the system is turned on, your vehicle
needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The traction control system warning light may
come on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the
traction control button. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning
light should go off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 365 for more
information.
• If there’s a brake system problem that is
specifically related to traction control, the
traction control system will turn off and
the warning light will come on. If your brakes
begin to overheat, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
228
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If
the red gage lamp turns on, your engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
See Engine Overheating on page 435.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle
with this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 412.
229
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
230
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your retailer for service as
soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 417.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 414. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your retailer can check the vehicle. Your
retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order
to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
231
Oil Pressure Light
If you have low engine
oil pressure, this light
will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil. The engine could be low on oil,
or could have some other oil problem. Have it
fixed immediately by your GM retailer.
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show
you it is working. The light will go out when you
turn the ignition on. If it does not come on with
the ignition on, you may have a problem with
the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on
for a moment. This is normal.
232
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
For information
regarding this light, see
Theft-Deterrent
Systems on page 133.
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 188
for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps or the
Flash-to-Pass feature is
in use.
United States
Canada
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you
have left when the ignition is on.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 185.
233
Here are four things some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up
than the gage reads. For example, the
gage read half full, but it took more (or less)
than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the
ignition is turned off.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly
when you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.
234
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display
located in the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer. The DIC buttons are located on
the center of the instrument panel, below the
center outlets.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display WELCOME
DRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is
used, and then the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off. The
driver number also corresponds to the numbers,
1 or 2, on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,
fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system
information, and compass display, if equipped.
It also displays warning messages if a system
problem is detected. In addition, the DIC displays
phone numbers that are called using the
OnStar® system, if equipped. See OnStar®
System on page 154.
If equipped, the outside air temperature
automatically appears in the bottom right corner of
the DIC display when viewing all of the information
screens, except for the oil life screens. If the
outside air temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C),
the temperature reading will toggle between
displaying the outside temperature and the word
ICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with the
system that controls the temperature display,
the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit)
will appear on the display. If this occurs, have the
vehicle serviced by your retailer.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different modes which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on
the center of the instrument panel. The buttons
are the information, set/reset, and menu buttons.
The button functions are detailed in the following
pages.
DIC Buttons
The DIC also allows some features to be
customized or personalized, if equipped. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261 for more information.
Q4R (Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,
average speed, fuel economy, battery voltage, oil
life, and to turn off the DIC.
r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
235
q (Menu): Press this button to display the units,
language, personalization, if equipped, compass
zone and compass calibration, if equipped.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) on
page 240 for more information.
Information Button Items
Q4R (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following items:
Odometer
Press the information button until the odometer
displays. This mode shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles or
kilometers.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the information button until A or B displays.
This mode shows the current distance traveled
in either miles or kilometers since the last reset for
each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be
used at the same time.
236
The display will show the odometer on the top line
and the trip odometer information, either A or B,
on the bottom line.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
There is also a retroactive trip odometer function
that performs the following for each trip
odometer:
• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h) during the current ignition cycle,
this function will set the trip odometer to the
distance driven during the current ignition
cycle.
• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometer
to the distance driven during the previous
ignition cycle plus the distance driven during
the current ignition cycle.
Press and hold the set/reset button for
three seconds, then release the button. The
retroactive trip odometer value will be set into the
currently displayed trip odometer.
Time Elapsed
Fuel Range
Press the information button until TIME
ELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like a
stopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takes
to get from one point to another. Each of the
fields for the hours, minutes, and seconds are
two numeric digits.
Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the
set/reset button to start the timing feature.
Press the set/reset button again to stop it. If you
will be starting and stopping your vehicle, during a
trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature
will automatically start timing where it left off when
you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold
the set/reset button for approximately 1.5 seconds.
The display will return to zero.
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the approximate
number of remaining miles or kilometers the
vehicle can be driven without refueling.
Fuel range is based on several factors, including
distance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity,
etc. This estimate will change if driving conditions
change. For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this mode may read
one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though the
same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is
because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city
driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW
will display followed by the LOW FUEL message.
See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 241 for more information.
Average Speed
Press the information button until AVERAGE
SPEED displays. This mode shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various vehicle speed
recorded since the last reset of this value. To reset
the value, press the information button to display
AVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
237
Average Fuel Economy
Oil Life
Press the information button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This mode shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was
reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold
the set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Press the information button until OIL LIFE
displays. This mode shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99%
on the display, that means 99% of the current oil
life remains. The engine oil life system will
alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
Battery
Press the information button until BATTERY
displays. This mode shows the current battery
voltage.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this
information on the DIC. This is normal.
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, a DIC message will display. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 241 for
more information.
238
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
You should change your oil as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 423. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 522 for more
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
accidentally at any time other than when the oil
has just been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 426. The display will show 100%
when the system is reset.
Menu Button Items
Personalization (Uplevel Only)
q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through the
Press the menu button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may have
personalization capabilities that allow you
to program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two drivers.
following items:
Units
Press the menu button until UNITS displays. This
mode allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this mode,
press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC.
Language
Press the menu button until the language screen
displays. This mode allows you to select the
language in which the DIC messages will appear.
Once in this mode, press the set/reset button
to select among the following choices:
• English
• Francais (French)
• Espanol (Spanish)
Your vehicle may also have customization
capabilities that allow you to program certain
features to one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to one setting on
the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 261 for additional information on personal
programming.
Compass Zone (Uplevel Only)
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to compensate for compass variance
and reset the zone. To change the compass zone
through the DIC, see DIC Compass (Uplevel
Only) on page 240.
239
Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only)
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. To
calibrate the compass through the DIC, see DIC
Compass (Uplevel Only) on page 240.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to compensate for compass variance
and reset the zone through the DIC.
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)
Compass variance is the difference between the
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, the compass in the vehicle could give
false readings.
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE
displays. Press the set/reset button to change the
compass zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available.
The direction the vehicle is moving will be
displayed in the top right corner of the DIC display.
240
In order to do this, the compass must be set or
calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle
is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE
displays.
4. Press the menu button to advance to the
COMPASS CALIBRATION screen.
5. To start the compass calibration, press and
hold the set/reset button until CALIBRATION
BEGUN DRIVE UNTIL DONE appears in
the DIC display.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two times
to activate the compass.
When the calibration is complete, the DIC will
display CALIBRATION FINISHED.
7. If the message CAL appears in the DIC,
you must manually put the compass into
the calibration mode again. Repeat
Steps 1 through 6.
DIC Warnings and Messages
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and
variance zone number on the map.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through
and select the appropriate variance zone.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
241
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge that you received the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
cleared.
If there are any active warning messages when the
vehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the DIC
goes into a reminder mode. The reminder mode
displays any active message. If there are multiple
messages, the DIC displays each message for
five seconds. After each active message is
displayed once, the reminder mode turns off.
You should take any messages that appear on
the display seriously and remember that clearing
the messages will only make the messages
disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
242
A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 228. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
This message comes on while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this warning message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on. If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired by
your retailer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver system starts
reducing certain features of the vehicle that
you may be able to notice. At the point that the
features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
This message displays when service is required
for the vehicle. See your retailer. See Engine
Oil on page 423 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 522 for more information.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to
15.5 volts. You can monitor the battery voltage by
pressing the information button until BATTERY
displays.
The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen
under the gages menu on the DIC must also be
reset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 235 and Engine Oil Life System
on page 426.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
243
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when there is a problem
with the generator and battery charging systems.
Driving with this problem could drain the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop
and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Have the electrical system checked by your
retailer immediately.
This message displays if the fuel cap is not on, or
is not fully tightened. Check the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank
on page 417 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
244
This message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
DELAYED LOCKING
This message displays to inform the driver that
even though a door lock switch or the lock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
has been pressed, that actual locking of the doors
is being delayed because the delayed locking
feature has been activated in the DIC. See
“DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261 for
more information.
This message appears and a chime sounds when
the ignition is off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver’s door is
not closed properly. When this message appears,
make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver’s side rear
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, make sure that the driver’s side rear door
is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
245
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do
not increase the engine speed above normal
idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 435 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant
temperature warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 228 for more
information.
To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the
air conditioner if it is on. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioner
can be turned back on.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
246
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message displays when the amount of
available light outside of the vehicle is low, or the
windshield wipers have been on for approximately
30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control is
off or in the park lamps position. This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps
is recommended. See Exterior Lamps on
page 192 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HOOD AJAR
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed
properly. When this message appears, make sure
that the hood is closed completely. See Hood
Release on page 421.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message displays when the battery in the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 107.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
247
KEY IN IGNITION
LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays and a chime sounds
continuously when the driver’s door is open and
the key is in ACCESSORY or LOCK.
This message displays when the left rear turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
on page 458.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message disappears and the chiming stops
when the key is removed from the ignition.
LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the left front turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps
and Sidemarker Lamps on page 456.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
248
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LIFT GATE AJAR
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message displays when the liftgate is not
closed completely. Make sure that the liftgate is
closed completely. See Liftgate on page 128.
This message displays when the brake fluid level
is low. Have the brake system serviced by
your retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes on
page 445 for proper fluid level.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted out
of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 226.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
249
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 233 and Filling the Tank
on page 417 for more information.
The message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected. Severe engine damage can result
from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
See Engine Oil on page 423 for more
information.
250
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
Pressure Light on page 232.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your
retailer as soon as possible when this message is
displayed.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged and
cleared from the screen. This message re-displays
for a few seconds if the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PARKING BRAKE ON
PARK LAMPS ON
This message displays to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in
RUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h). Release the parking brake before
driving. See Parking Brake on page 147 for more
information.
This message displays to alert the driver when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on while the
ignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. See
Exterior Lamps on page 192 for more information.
A chime sounds continuously while this message
is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 226.
A chime sounds continuously while this message
is displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the front passenger’s
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, make sure that the front passenger’s
door is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
251
PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the passenger’s side
rear door is not closed properly. When this
message appears, make sure that the passenger’s
side rear door is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
252
PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOT
FASTENED
This message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is
buckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled
with the passenger airbag enabled, and the
vehicle is in motion. You should have the
passenger buckle their safety belt.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckled
and the passenger is still unbuckled and the
passenger airbag is enabled. If the passenger’s
safety belt is already buckled, this message
and chime will not come on.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. This happens when driving
conditions, such as climbing a steep hill, make the
transaxle overwork in a gear that may cause
damage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate.
This message displays when your vehicle is in
an overheated engine operating mode. This
operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and
engine performance. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 437 for more
information. Anytime this message is on, the
vehicle should be taken to your retailer for service
as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
253
REMOTE START DISABLED
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays if a remote start attempt is
unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the
following conditions are true when a remote
start attempt is made:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The key is in the ignition.
• The hood or the doors are not closed.
• There is an emission control system
•
•
•
•
•
254
malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
The maximum number of remote starts
or remote start attempts between ignition
cycles has been reached.
The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 261 and
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 107 for
more information.
REMOTE START ON
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when a remote start is initiated.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 107 for
more information.
RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the right front turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps
and Sidemarker Lamps on page 456.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
This message displays when the right rear turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
on page 458.
This message displays when the vehicle’s
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) is not functioning
properly. Have the ABS serviced by your
retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
The ABS warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 227.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds
if the message has been acknowledged, but
the condition still exists when the engine is
turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
255
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the airbag
readiness light if there is a problem with the airbag
system. Have your retailer inspect the system
for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 223 and Airbag System on page 83 for
more information.
This message displays when a problem with the
brake system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your retailer as soon as
possible.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 226.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds
if the message has been acknowledged, but
the condition still exists when the engine is
turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
256
SERVICE PARK LAMPS
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp
fuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 512 and
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 512 for
more information. If changing the fuse does not
correct the problem, see your retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays if there has been a problem detected with
StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 367.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on or turns back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak® System inspected by your retailer as
soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
257
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the system is
not functioning properly. A warning light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 228. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 365 for more information. Have the TCS
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine
is turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds
if the message has been acknowledged, but
the condition still exists when the engine is
turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
258
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery
road conditions may exist when this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 367.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® is not active.
This message cannot be acknowledged and
cleared from the screen.
STABILITY CONTROL OFF
STARTING DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled due to the electronic throttle control
system or vehicle theft-deterrent system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your retailer
immediately.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays any time the system turns off. When this
message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is
no longer available to assist you with directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 367.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
RUN and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message displays only while the ignition is
in RUN.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the system is
on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 365 for more information.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® system to turn off:
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See
your retailer for service.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the TCS is no longer active.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared
from the screen.
259
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the TCS turns
off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 365 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN and disappears after two seconds.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
TCS to turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button located on the center of the
instrument panel. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 365.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your retailer for
service.
TRANSMISSION FLUID HOT
This message displays when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
allow it to idle until it cools down. If the warning
message continues to display, have the vehicle
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.
260
This message displays and a chime sounds only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off
the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for
more than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn
signal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on
page 183.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. This message
clears from the DIC if the turn signal is manually
turned off, a turn is completed, or the message
is acknowledged.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features can
only be programmed to one setting on the
vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred
setting for two different drivers. The customization
features include the following:
• Exterior lighting delay
• Interior lighting delay
• Delayed locking
• Content theft
• Remote keyless entry feedback
• Remote start
• Rear park chime
Your vehicle may also have personalization
capabilities that allow you to program certain
features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
The first personalized key corresponds to driver 1
and the second personalized key corresponds to
driver 2. The driver number also corresponds to the
numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remote keyless
entry transmitters.
The personalization features include the following:
• Radio station presets
• Auto door unlock preferences
• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences
All of the customization and personalization options
may not be available on your vehicle. Only the
options available will be displayed on your DIC.
The default settings for the customization and
personalization features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been
changed from their default setting since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
The driver’s personalization preferences are
recalled by using the key programmed for
driver 1 or 2. The driver number also corresponds
to the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the
remote keyless entry transmitters.
To change customization and personalization
preferences, use the following procedure.
261
Entering the Personal Program Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle
in PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the menu button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONAL
PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.
If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal
program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM
NOT AVAILABLE will display.
3. Press the set/reset button to begin.
4. The DIC will then display an instruction
screen.
Press the menu button to display the modes
that are available to program.
Press the set/reset button to change the
setting of each mode.
Customization Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
FACTORY DEFAULTS
This feature allows you to set all of the
customization and personalization features back to
their factory default settings.
Press the menu button until FACTORY
DEFAULTS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
NO (default): The customization and
personalization features will not be set to their
factory default settings.
YES: The customization and personalization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
If YES is selected, the keys will need to be
personalized again to be recognized as key 1 or 2.
See “PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this section
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
262
ALL KEYS RESET
This screen will only display if YES was selected
on the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
following choices:
CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to
their factory default settings and the DIC will
return to the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
OK: The features will be set to their factory default
settings, the DIC will exit the personal program
menu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED
will display.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY
This feature allows you to set the amount of time
the exterior lamps remain on after the key is
removed from the ignition or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
15 seconds.
30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
60 seconds.
90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
90 seconds.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
263
INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED
This feature enables the interior lamps in
the vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds after
the key is removed from the ignition.
Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYS
REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not
cause the interior lamps to turn on.
ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition
will cause the interior lamps to be turned on for
about 25 seconds.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it
may be activated when the key is out of the
ignition by doing one of the following:
• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch
one time while the driver’s door is open.
• Pressing the passenger’s door power lock
switch one time while the passenger’s
door is open.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter one time while any
door is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed
locking is active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating
one of the above actions more than one time.
DELAYED LOCKING
If a door remains open, without any other
door being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock
after approximately 45 seconds.
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all of the doors have been closed
for approximately five seconds.
If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors. See Delayed Locking on page 116
for more information.
264
Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFT
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned off.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors
will be delayed by five seconds while a door
is open after a power door lock switch is pressed,
or the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed while a door is open.
ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system
will be turned on.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
CONTENT THEFT
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, once this feature is turned on, the system
will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the remote keyless entry transmitter
or the correct key. It will also activate when an
incorrect key is used in the ignition.
When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent
system will be armed when the vehicle is locked by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or by pressing the power
door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 133 and Power Door Locks on page 116
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
265
FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press the menu button until FOB LOCK
FEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
the remote start to be turned OFF or ON. The
remote start feature allows you to start the engine
from outside of the vehicle using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 107 for more information.
OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the
vehicle.
Press the menu button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will
sound when the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds of the previous command.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
266
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
REAR PARK CHIME
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, this feature allows
the URPA system’s chime to be turned OFF or
ON. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
on page 200 for more information.
Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled.
NO (default): The key will not be personalized.
ON (default): The URPA system’s chime will
be enabled.
YES: The key will be personalized.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Personalization Menu Items
The following are personalization features that
allow you to program setting for up to two drivers:
PERSONALIZE KEY
If you are using a key that has already been
personalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2, this
screen will not display. This feature allows
you to personalize a key to be recognized as
key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you
to program personalization features to a preferred
setting to correspond to key 1 or 2.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
REPLACE KEY
This screen displays only if YES was selected for
the PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2
have already been personalized, and the current
key being used is not key 1 or 2. This feature
allows you to program a key to be recognized as
key 1 or 2 in the event that the previously
programmed key needs to be replaced.
1: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 1.
2: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 2.
CANCEL (default): The key will not be
programmed.
267
RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED
This screen displays only if YES was selected for
the PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature
allows you to set the radio station presets to be
recognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is being
used. Once this message displays, set the radio
station presets. If the presets are not set at
this time, the presets will not be recognized for
key 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio station
presets will be maintained.
ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key
is taken out of the ignition.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
AUTO UNLOCK ON
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was
selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.
This feature allows the selection of when the
vehicle’s doors will unlock.
This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be
turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for
all of the doors.
Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ON
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key
is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken
out of the ignition.
DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key
is taken out of the ignition.
268
PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS
This feature allows the selection of which doors
will unlock on the first press of the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 107 for more information.
Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON
1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock
on the first press of the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it. The DIC will then display PRESS
UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB. Press the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter and your setting will be saved for that
remote keyless entry transmitter.
After programming the last option, the message
KEY FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appear
on the DIC display for a few seconds if you
personalized the key. Next, the message
PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will appear briefly
on the DIC display, then the display will return
to the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.
Exiting the Personal Program Menu
The personal program menu will be exited when
any of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The end of the personal program menu is
reached.
269
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 358. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
270
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far
greater access to audio stations and song
listings. Giving extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving can
cause a crash and you or others can be
injured or killed. Always keep your eyes
on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended
searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 358.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your retailer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety
belts, parking brake, and other functions
of your vehicle operate through the radio/
entertainment system. If that equipment
is replaced or additional equipment is added to
your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Make
sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 412.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 139 for more information.
271
Setting the Time
Radio with CD
Press the H or the M button to enter clock mode.
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears
on the display. Press and hold M until the correct
minute appears on the display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press either the H or the M button to
enter the clock mode, then press the tune knob to
select between the 12 or 24 hour display format.
The clock mode will automatically time out with the
changed display format set as the current default
setting.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
similar
272
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station may broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters appear on the display.
RDS stations may also provide the time of day,
a program type (PTY) for current programming,
and the name of the program being broadcast.
Playing the Radio
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob to
turn the system on and off. Turn this knob to
increase or to decrease the volume.
4 (Information): For RDS, press this button to
change what appears on the display while
using RDS. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of
the program (if available).
273
For XM™ (if equipped), press the information
button while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
information button until you see the display
you want, then hold the button for two seconds.
The radio produces one beep and the selected
display becomes the default.
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive, by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select AUTO VOLUME MIN, AUTO
VOLUME MED, or AUTO VOLUME MAX. Each
higher setting provides more volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFF
appears on the display.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
This button is not available on the Radio
with Six-Disc CD.
274
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
display shows the selection.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on
the display. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on
the display. The radio goes to the next preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either scan arrow again
or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob to
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set returns and
the equalization that was selected is stored
for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
select BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turn
the knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when the
tone control is on the display. The level changes
to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when no
tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO
SETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
this button to select customized equalization
settings designed for country/western, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical. Selecting CUSTOM
or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
manual bass and treble settings.
The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
275
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this
knob until BALANCE appears on the display.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle
position, press and hold this knob when the
speaker control is on the display. The level
changes to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when no
tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO
SETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
Finding a Category Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected
category appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow to take you to a category’s
station. SEEKING CATEGORY appears on
the display.
4. To go to another station within that category,
press the CAT button to display the category,
then press either SEEK arrow to go to
another station.
If both category and traffic are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected category
and traffic announcements. This function does not
work with XM™.
If the radio cannot find the desired category,
NONE appears on the display and the radio
returns to the last station you were listening to.
This function does not work with XM™.
276
SCAN: Scan the stations within a category by
performing the following:
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected
category appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press
and hold either SCAN arrow until you hear a
beep and SCAN CATEGORY appears on
the display. The radio begins scanning
the stations in the category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both category and TRAF are on, the radio scans
for stations with the selected category and
traffic announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger
station with the same category. To turn alternate
frequency on, press and hold BAND for four
seconds. AF ON appears on the display. The radio
may switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for four seconds. AF OFF appears on
the display. The radio does not switch to other
stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
277
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement comes
on the current radio station, ALERT! appears on the
display. You will hear the announcement, even if
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
4 (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO appears on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release this
button. A new group of words appears on the
display after every press of the button. Once the
complete message has displayed, INFO disappears
from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by
278
pressing this button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO appears on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found,
the radio stops seeking and TA appears on
the display. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC appears
on the display.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to
turn off the traffic announcements.
The radio plays the traffic announcement even if
the volume is low. The radio interrupts the
play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, it
means that the radio has not been configured
properly for your vehicle and must be returned to
your retailer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to your retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your retailer when reporting the
problem.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 293 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol
appears on the display. As each new track starts to
play the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 355 for more information.
279
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM DISC appears on the display.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse the current track.
280
fast forward through the current track.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a
track over again. REPEAT appears on the display.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. If either arrow is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD while listening to the radio. CD appears on the
display when a CD is in the player. If the system
has a remote playback device, pressing this button
a second time allows the remote device to play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD.
EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of
the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs
on page 355 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number appears on the display.
281
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the load button.
3. When INSET CD # appears on the display,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
282
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds.
A beep will sound and LOAD ALL DISC
appears on the display.
3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD #
to appear on the display, then load the next
CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not
try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
CDs, press the load button to cancel the loading
function. The radio begins to play the last CD
loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number
for each CD appears on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the
display. To play a specific CD press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see
“CD Messages” later in this section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the eject button for
two seconds.
A beep will sound and EJECT ALL DISCS
appears on the display.
2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display,
the CD ejects and can be removed.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load or
the eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
CD automatically pulls back into the player. If CD
is pushed back into the player, before the
25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD several
times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually.
The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at each
press of eject, causing the player to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has
elapsed.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse within the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
fast forward through the current track.
283
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD or all of the loaded CDs.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the
RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on
the display.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release this
button until RANDOM DISC PLAY appears on
the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appears
on the display.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
To turn off random play, press and release the
RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the
display.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track
or an entire CD over again.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this
button until REPEAT appears on the display.
• To repeat an entire CD, press and release this
button until REPEAT ONE DISC appears on
the display.
284
t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. CD appears on the
display when a CD is in the player. If your
system is equipped with a remote playback device,
pressing this button a second time allows the
remote device to play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio may have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R disc. For more information on how to play
an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3 on
page 287 later in this section.
Using R (Song List) Mode
(Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)
This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections. To save tracks into the song list
feature, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not appear
on the display. If S-LIST is present, press the
song list button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
right arrow or turn the tune knob to locate
the track to be saved. The track begins
to play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save
the track into memory. When song list is
pressed, one beep will sound. ADDED SONG
appears on the display.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
SONGLIST FULL appears on the display if you try
to save more than 20 selections.
285
To play the song list, press the song list button.
The recorded tracks begins to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track returns
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tune
knob to select the desired track to be
deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for
two seconds. Release the button when
SONG REMOVED appears on the display.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
286
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more
than four seconds. One beep will sound.
SONGLIST EMPTY appears on the display
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
saved to the song list again are added to the
bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will sound and S-LIST is removed
from the display.
CD Messages
Using an MP3
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
MP3 CD-R Disc
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your retailer when reporting the
problem.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl
extension, other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album will be available for display by the
radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
287
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
Root Directory
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
• Do not use CD-RW discs.
• Do not use colored discs.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the
directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
The player will be able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,
or playlist names may use more disc memory
space than necessary. To conserve space on the
disc, minimize the length of the file, folder, or
playlist names. You can also play an MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep
the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum cannot be accessed.
288
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder will not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder functions will not function
on a CD that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)
first and then go to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then
play begins from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have played, play continues from
files according to their numerical listing. After
playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first
folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. See the information button later in
this section for more information. The new track
name appears on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as
the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
will not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
289
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING appears
on the display. The CD should begin playing and
the CD symbol appears on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
290
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of
the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs
on page 355 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time, or
attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you
could damage the CD player. When using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a time, and
keep the CD player and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Press and hold
this button to reverse through the current track.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM ALL appears on the
display.
| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
To turn off random play, press and release the
RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the
display.
the first track in the next folder. Press and hold
this button to fast forward the current track.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track,
CD, or a folder over again.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this
button until REPEAT TRACK appears on
the display.
• To repeat a CD, press and release this button
until REPEAT DISC appears on the display.
• To repeat a folder, press and release
this button until REPEAT FOLDER appears on
the display.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release this
button until RANDOM DISC appears on
the display.
• To play the tracks in the folder you are
listening to in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM FOLDER appears
on the display.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the
RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on
the display.
291
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
4 (Information): Press this button to display the
artist name and album contained in the ID3 tag.
This button is not available on the Radio
with Six-Disc CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
appears on the display when a CD is loaded.
Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off.
292
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
XL on the radio display,
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels)
after the channel name,
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay)
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title
No song title information is available at this time on this
not available
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
No category information is available at this time on this
not available
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available
on this channel. The system is working properly.
293
Radio Display Message
Condition
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
XM Locked
Theft lock active
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
Hardware failure
Chk XMRcvr
Action Required
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
retailer.
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option A, Uplevel)
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
Your vehicle may have this type of DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it has
this feature, it will include a DVD player, a video
display screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets of
wireless headphones (if included), and a remote
control.
294
Parental Control
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using RSA, or when a
DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen
and to mute the audio. The power indicator
lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the
parental control will also disable all other button
operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA,
DVD player, and remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player, the system will power up
in auxiliary mode.
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so. The RSE
system will play DVD, CD, and MP3 discs. You can
also connect an auxiliary device to the RSE system
to play games, watch videos, look at pictures, etc.
Normal operation may be limited under extremely
low or high temperatures, in order to protect
the system from damage. Operate the RSE system
under normal or comfortable cabin temperature
ranges.
Headphones
Wireless Headphones
The RSE system may include two sets of wireless
headphones (batteries are included).
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch, a channel select switch, and a volume
control. To use the headphones, turn the switch to
ON. An indicator light on the headphones will
illuminate. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF
when not in use.
The headphones will shut off automatically to save
the battery power if the RSE system is shut off
or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. The
transmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.
295
If you move too far forward or step out of the
vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found
on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or
CH2 of the wireless headphones.
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,
use the volume control.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,
MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissing
noise through the speakers and/or headphones.
If the hissing sound in the wireless headphones
seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
hissing is normal.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include
foam ear pads that can be replaced.
296
Foam ear pads on these headphones may become
worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads
can become damaged if they are not handled or
stored properly. If the foam ear pads do become
damaged or worn out, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. It is not
necessary to replace the complete headphone set.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can
be ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more
information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment
door located on the left side of the headphone
earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery
compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries, and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
Wired Headphones
Stereo RCA Jacks
There is a right and left wired headphone jack.
To adjust the volume, do the following:
1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding
jack, located behind the video screen, next
to the auxiliary jacks.
2. Press the corresponding headphone button on
the DVD faceplate.
3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on the
DVD faceplate, to increase or to decrease the
volume.
The wired headphones work as follows:
• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will
play RSE audio.
• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
audio and video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is
used for video inputs, the red RCA jack for right
audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left audio
inputs. The system requires standard RCA
cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
297
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the
front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned
on, the player will automatically begin playing
the disc and the user will need to press the AUX
button on the remote control or on the DVD
player faceplate to switch the system between the
DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices
can be heard through the following possible
sources:
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wireless Headphones
• Wired Headphones (not included)
298
Vehicle Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be
heard through all of the vehicle’s speakers when
the following occurs:
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and the CD AUX
button is pressed to enable the RSE system
DVD will appear on the radio display when the
RSE system is on.
To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press
the CD AUX button on the radio. The audio
from the RSE system can be heard through the
wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers at
the same time. The volume on the radio may
vary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,
MP3, or an auxiliary device.
Video Screen
DVD Player
The video screen is located in the overhead
console.
The DVD player is located in the overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button and the
screen will fold down.
2. Adjust its position as desired.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons
on the DVD player and/or by the buttons on
the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its stowed and latched position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for
the country that the vehicle was sold. The DVD
region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhanced
CDs, video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3
media are supported by this DVD player. DVD+R,
DVD+RW, and copy protected CDs may or
may not be supported by the DVD player. The
DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD audio
media. An error message will appear on the
display if this type of media is inserted into the
DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
299
DVD Player Buttons
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
device.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play
of a disc.
tr / [ u (Previous and Fast Reverse/Next
and Fast Forward): These controls can be
used to move forward or backward through a disc.
cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this
button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding.
Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the
player is already stopped, then only press this
button once.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
300
These buttons can also be used to modify RSA,
rear temperature, rear fan speed, and wired
headphone volume adjustment. See “Headphones”
earlier in this section, Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option A, Uplevel) on page 325 or Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) (Option B, Uplevel) on
page 328, and Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel) on page 212 or Rear Climate
Control System (Option B, Uplevel) on page 215
for more information.
When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the
RSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause
buttons are the only buttons that will work.
Playing a Disc
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start if the vehicle is in
ACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that
the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause
button on the player faceplate or on the remote
control. You can also, press the CD AUX button on
the radio faceplate, until RSE appears on the
display, to start playing a disc.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
skipping of the copyright information or previews.
Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews
have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing at
the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control. The movie should resume play from where
it was last stopped if the disc has not been
ejected.
If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume
play at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player
faceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject the
disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
a short period of time.
301
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
The RSE system will include a remote control
(batteries are included). To use the remote control,
aim it at the transmitter window next to the RSE
faceplate and press the desired button. Direct
sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of
the transmitter to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not
seem to be working, the batteries may need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight will
affect the function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlighting on. The backlight will
automatically turn off after eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to display the current
title number. Each press of this button will
move the disc to the next available title.
302
n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the
main DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
q (Return): Press this button to go back one
step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVD
menus. Press this button to exit the current menu
and to move to the previous menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the disc.
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
Press this button again to return to the previous
chapter or track. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or previews.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
303
e (Sound): Press this button to display the
\ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds
current audio track. Each press will move the DVD
to the next language or commentary. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display the
current subtitles. Each press of this button
will move the DVD to the next available subtitle
option (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).
The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
d (Camera): Press this button to display the
current camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature. Each press will move the DVD to the
next available camera angle. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers greater
than nine. Press this button before inputting the
number.
RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or
an auxiliary device, do the following:
To access this menu, press the display button on
the remote control. Once the menu is on the
screen, use the directional arrows and the enter
button to navigate the screen. This menu will
let you select default preferences for video format,
language preference, brightness, color, contrast,
and tint. Not all DVDs support all the feature
defaults in the setup menus. If a feature is not
supported, the defaults will be provided by
the DVD media. To exit this menu, press the
display or the return button on the remote control
or wait for the menu to time out.
The default language selection will apply to all
future DVDs.
304
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or
an MP3, do the following:
Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the
RSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,
then press the display button on the remote
control. Once the menu is on the screen, use the
directional arrows and the enter button to
navigate the screen. This menu will let you select
default preferences for language and playback
settings. To exit this menu, press the display or the
return button on the remote control or wait for
the menu to time out.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of
the remote control, down.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery door.
No sound — Wireless
Headphones
Recommended Action
The ignition may not be
in ACCESSORY, RUN,
or RAP.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator lights will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the AUX button to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
source. The disc is upside
down or is not compatible.
Turn the headphones on.
Make sure the correct
channel is selected on the
wireless headphones.
Check the batteries.
The volume on the
headphones could be too
low, adjust the volume.
305
Problem
No sound — Wired
Headphones
No sound — Vehicle
Speakers
The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
I ejected the disc and
tried to take it out, but
it was pulled back into
the slot.
306
Recommended Action
Make sure the wired
headphones are plugged
in. Adjust the volume. If
RSA is on, DVD audio will
not be heard.
If the DVD system is
being heard through the
vehicle speakers, adjust
the volume on the radio.
Press the CD AUX button
on the radio to make sure
that RSE is enabled. The
rear speakers will mute
when RSA is on.
This is normal for this
operation.
Video mode may not be
correctly set. See “RSE
OSD” earlier in this
section.
Press the eject
button once.
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu
or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote
control and change the
audio or language
selection on the DVD
menu. To change the
language preference,
press the display button to
access the RSE OSD
menu. See “RSE OSD”
earlier in this section.
The remote control does
Point the remote control
not work.
directly at the face of the
DVD unit. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed, the power
indicator lights will flash.
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button
or off?
on the remote control to
select subtitle option or go
to the DVDs main menu
and follow the screen
prompts.
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Press and release the
AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD player
to get to auxiliary input.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
The audio or video skips
The DVD could be dirty or
or jumps.
scratched. Try cleaning
the disc.
Some commands that do
The fast forward, fast
one thing for DVDs will not
reverse, previous, and
next functions do not work. always work or perform the
same function for audio,
audio discs, or games.
These functions may also
be disabled when the DVD
is playing the copyright
information or the
previews. When RSA is
on, these buttons control
RSA functions.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
ignition off, then on again,
then press the eject
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
retailer for further
assistance.
I lost the remote control
Contact your retailer for
and/or the headphones.
assistance.
This could be caused by
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
towers or by using the
or buzzes for a moment,
cellular telephone or other
then it comes back.
radio transmitter devices
in the vehicle.
307
Problem
DVD System inoperable.
The wireless headphones
have audio distortion.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
308
Recommended Action
In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges. See
your retailer if the problem
persists.
Verify that the
headphones are facing to
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.
Verify that there is no
obstruction between the
headphone(s) and the
transmitter.
Verify that the batteries
have a full charge.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen.
Disc Format Error: This message will be
displayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if the
disc is not readable, or if the disc format is
not compatible.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed
if the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched
or damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the region code of the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be
displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or
ejected.
No Disc: This message will be displayed when
you try to play or eject a disc that is not in
the player.
X: An X will be displayed, in the upper left corner
of the video screen, if the operation that has
been selected is not currently available.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with video distortion
when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB
radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way
radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage may result.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option B, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it has
this feature, it will include a DVD player, a video
display screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, next to the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using rear seat audio (RSA),
or when a DVD or CD is playing to make the video
screen go blank and to mute the audio. The power
indicator lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning
on the parental control will also disable all other
button operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD
player, and remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and to automatically resume play
of a disc that is in the player while the vehicle is on.
If no disc is in the player, the system will power up
and display no display on the LCD screen.
309
Before You Drive
Wireless Headphones
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
The RSE system can play DVD, CD, and MP3
discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device to
the RSE system to play games, watch videos,
look at pictures, etc.
The RSE system may include two sets of wireless
headphones (batteries may be included with
the headphone sets).
Normal operation may be limited under extremely
low or high temperatures, in order to protect
the system from damage. Operate the RSE system
under normal or comfortable cabin temperature
ranges.
Headphones
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch, a channel select switch, and a volume
control. To use the headphones, turn the ON/OFF
switch to ON. An indicator light on the headphones
will come on. If the light does not come on, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF when
not in use.
The headphones will shut off automatically to save
the battery power if the RSE system is off or if
the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. The
transmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.
If you move too far forward or step out of the
vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found
on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or
CH2 of the wireless headphones.
310
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,
use the volume control located on the
headphones.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,
MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissing
noise through the speakers and/or headphones.
If the hissing sound in the wireless headphones
seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
hissing is normal.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include
foam ear pads that can be replaced.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may
become worn or damaged. The headphone foam
ear pads can become damaged if they are not
handled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads do
become damaged or worn out, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set.
It is not necessary to replace the complete
headphone set.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can
be ordered in pairs. See your retailer for more
information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment
door located on the left side of the headphone
earpiece.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery
compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries, and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
Wired Headphones
There is a right and left wired headphone jack.
To adjust the volume, do the following:
1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding
jack, located behind the video screen, next
to the auxiliary jacks.
311
2. Press the headphone volume control button
until the Wired Headset Volume is displayed
and the Left wired headphone is highlighted
for selection. Press the volume control button
again to select the Right volume control.
Another way to select either the Left or Right
Wired Headset Volume is to press the up
or down arrows on the DVD faceplate.
3. Press the right and left arrow buttons on the
DVD faceplate to increase or to decrease the
volume. Press the headphone volume
control button again or wait for a few seconds
until the screen disappears.
The wired headphones work as follows:
• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will
play RSE audio.
• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
312
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
audio and video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is
used for video input, the red RCA jack for
right audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left
audio inputs. The system requires standard
RCA cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the
front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned
on, the player may automatically begin playing
the disc. Press the AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD AUX button on the DVD player
faceplate to switch the system between the
DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices
can be heard through the following sources:
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wireless Headphones
• Wired Headphones (not included)
Vehicle Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be
heard through all of the vehicle’s speakers when
the following occurs:
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and the CD AUX
button is pressed to enable the RSE system
DVD appears on the radio display when the RSE
system is on.
To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press
the CD AUX button on the radio. The audio
from the RSE system can be heard through the
wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers at
the same time. The volume on the radio may
vary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,
MP3, or an auxiliary device.
313
Video Screen
DVD Player
The video screen is located in the overhead
console.
The DVD player is located in the overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button and the screen will
fold down.
2. Adjust its position as desired.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons
on the DVD player and/or by the buttons on
the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its stowed and latched position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for
the country that the vehicle was sold. The DVD
region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The player is capable of playing the following
media formats: DVD (single and dual player),
DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD-ROM with MP3,
DVD-ROM with WMA, CD-DA, CD-R/RW,
CD-ROM with MP3, CD-ROM with WMA,
Enhanced CD, SACD (CD player only). An error
message may appear on the display if any
other type of media is inserted into the DVD
player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
314
DVD Player Buttons
43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press this
button to select the correct headphone. Then press
the left or right arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the headphone volume.
When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the
RSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause
buttons are the only buttons that will work.
RSE Faceplate with Rear Seat Climate Controls
shown, RSE Faceplate without Rear Seat Climate
Controls similar
cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this
button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding.
Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the
player is already stopped, then only press this
button once.
DVD AUX (Disc Auxiliary): Press this button to
switch the system between the DVD player and an
auxiliary device.
rj (Play/Pause): Press the play button to start
play of a disc. Press the pause button while a
disc is playing to pause it. Press it again to
continue play of a disc.
RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press this
button to switch between playing the AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of the
sources are not loaded, the system will skip
over the source when this button is pressed.
q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
g (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
315
l (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
Playing a Disc
forward the DVD and CD. To stop forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start if the vehicle is in
ACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.
MENU (Disc): Press this button to view the main
DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
r (Enter/Select): Press this button to select
the choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): For vehicles
without rear seat climate control, this button will
take the place of the fan/temp button. For vehicles
with rear seat climate control, this button is also
found on the remote control. Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
316
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that
the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause
button on the player faceplate or on the remote
control. You can also press the DVD AUX button
on the player faceplate, or the CD AUX button
on the radio faceplate until RSE appears on
the display, to start playing a disc.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
skipping of the copyright information or previews.
Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews
have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing at
the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
Remote Control
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
The RSE system includes a remote control
(batteries may be included with the remote
control). To use the remote control, aim it at the
transmitter window next to the RSE faceplate and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light may affect the ability of the transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If
the remote control does not seem to be working,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight will affect the function
of the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was
last stopped if the disc has not been ejected.
If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume
play at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player
faceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject the
disc. There is no eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
a short period of time.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
317
Remote Control Buttons
n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the
player on and off.
main DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the
q (Return): Press this button to go back
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
remote control backlighting on. The backlight will
automatically turn off after eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to display the current
title number. Each press of this button will
move the disc to the next available title.
318
one step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVD
menus. Press this button to exit the current
menu and to move to the previous menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the disc.
e (Sound): Press this button to display the
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display the
to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
Press this button again to return to the previous
chapter or track. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or previews.
current subtitles. Each press of this button
will move the DVD to the next available subtitle
option (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).
The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
current audio track. Each press will move the DVD
to the next language or commentary. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
d (Camera): Press this button to display the
current camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature. Each press will move the DVD to the
next available camera angle. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
319
\ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds
after entering a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers greater
than 9. Press this button before entering the
number.
RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or
an auxiliary device, do the following:
To access this menu, press the display button on
the remote control or on the DVD faceplate, if
you do not have rear seat climate control. Once
the menu is on the screen, use the directional
arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.
This menu will let you select default preferences
for video format, language preference, brightness,
color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs support
all the feature defaults in the setup menus.
320
If a feature is not supported, the defaults will be
provided by the DVD media. To exit this menu,
press the display button, or the return button
on the remote control, or faceplate if there is no
rear seat climate control, or wait for the menu
to time out.
The default language selection will apply to all
future DVDs.
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or
an MP3, do the following:
Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the
RSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,
then press the display button on the remote
control, or faceplate if there is no rear seat climate
control. Once the menu is on the screen, use
the directional arrows and the enter button
to navigate the screen. This menu lets you select
default preferences for language and playback
settings. To exit this menu, press the display
button, or the return button on the remote control,
or faceplate if there is no rear seat climate
control, or wait for the menu to time out.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of
the remote control, down.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
3. Close the battery door.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
No sound — Wireless
Headphones
Recommended Action
The ignition may not be
in ACCESSORY, RUN,
or RAP.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator lights will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the DVD AUX
button on the player
faceplate or the AUX
button on the remote to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
sources. The disc is
upside down or is not
compatible.
Turn the headphones on.
Make sure the correct
channel is selected on the
wireless headphones.
Check the batteries.
The volume on the
headphones could be too
low, adjust the volume.
321
Problem
No sound — Wired
Headphones
No sound — Vehicle
Speakers
The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.
The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.
I ejected the disc and tried
to take it out, but it was
pulled back into the slot.
322
Recommended Action
Make sure the wired
headphones are plugged
in. Adjust the volume. If
RSA is on, DVD audio will
not be heard.
If the DVD system is
being heard through the
vehicle speakers, adjust
the volume on the radio.
Press the CD AUX button
on the radio to make sure
that RSE is enabled. The
rear speakers will mute
when RSA is on.
This is normal for this
operation.
Video mode may not be
correctly set. See “RSE
OSD” earlier in this
section.
Press the eject
button once.
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu
or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote
control and change the
audio or language
selection on the DVD
menu. To change the
language preference,
press the display button to
access the RSE OSD
menu. See “RSE OSD”
earlier in this section.
The remote control does
Point the remote control
not work.
directly at the face of the
DVD unit. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed, the power
indicator lights will flash.
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button
or off?
on the remote control to
select subtitle option or go
to the DVDs main menu
and follow the screen
prompts.
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Press and release the
AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD AUX
button on the player
faceplate to get to
auxiliary input. Check to
make sure that the
auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
The audio or video skips
The DVD could be dirty or
or jumps.
scratched. Try cleaning
the disc.
Some commands that do
The fast forward, fast
one thing for DVDs will not
reverse, previous, and
next functions do not work. always work or perform the
same function for audio,
audio discs, or games.
These functions may also
be disabled when the DVD
is playing the copyright
information or the
previews. When RSA is
on, these buttons may
control RSA functions.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
ignition off, then on again,
then press the eject
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
retailer for further
assistance.
I lost the remote control
Contact your retailer for
and/or the headphones.
assistance.
This could be caused by
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
towers or by using the
or buzzes for a moment,
cellular telephone or other
then it comes back.
radio transmitter devices
in the vehicle.
323
Problem
DVD System inoperable.
The wireless headphones
have audio distortion.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
324
Recommended Action
In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges. See
your retailer if the problem
persists.
Verify that the
headphones are facing to
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.
Verify that there is no
obstruction between the
headphone(s) and the
transmitter.
Verify that the batteries
have a full charge.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen.
Disc Format Error: This message is displayed if
a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is
not readable, or if the disc format is not
compatible.
Disc Play Error: This message is displayed if the
mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message is displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible
with the region code of the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message is displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
No Disc: This message is displayed when you try
to play or eject a disc that is not in the player.
X: A white X is displayed, in the upper left corner
of the video screen, if the operation that has
been selected is not currently available.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with video distortion
when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB
radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way
radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage may result.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option A, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio
(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allow
rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of
the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front
CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a CD in the front
radio and control it while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will not be able to
control the remote source. You can operate the
RSA when the main radio is off.
325
The DVD or auxiliary device will always be
available on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. All other RSA sources are available
on CHB or CH2 of the wireless headphones,
as well as the wired headphones. If the RSA is
off, the wired headphones will provide DVD
or auxiliary device audio. The rear seat
passengers will not be able to listen to XM, on
CHB or CH2, if the front passenger is listening to
a DVD or auxiliary device.
The remote control will not operate any of the
RSA features.
RSA O (Power): Press this button to turn the
RSA system on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 will
appear on the display when the system is on to
indicate the channel to receive audio for the
wireless headphones. Pressing this button will also
silence the rear speakers.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
selected radio station will appear on the display.
If the front passengers are listening to the
radio, the RSA will not switch between the bands
and cannot change the station.
tr / [ u (Tune): When listening to the
radio, press the right or the left arrow to go to the
next or the previous station and stay there.
This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track or to the previous
track. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track on the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
326
PROG (Program): Press this button to select the
next preset station stored on the radio. Each
press of this button will take you to the next preset
station. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
X (Headphone): Press the right or the left
headphone button to enable volume control of the
wired headphone connected to the corresponding
jack. Press the right and left arrow buttons to
change the volume.
When a CD is playing in the single CD player,
press this button to select the next track.
This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using RSA, or when a
DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen
and to mute the audio. The power indicator
lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the
parental control will also disable all other button
operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA,
DVD player, and remote control.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to select the next CD, if
multiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player,
and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped).
If one of the sources are not loaded, the system
will skip over the source when this button is
pressed.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player then the system will power
up in auxiliary mode.
327
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option B, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio
(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allow
rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of
the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front
CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a CD in the front
radio and control it while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will not be able to
control the remote source. You can operate the
RSA when the main radio is off.
The DVD or auxiliary device will always be available
on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. All other RSA sources are available
328
on channel (CHB or CH2) of the wireless
headphones, as well as the wired headphones. If
the RSA is off, the wired headphones will provide
DVD or auxiliary device audio. The rear seat
passengers will not be able to listen to XM, on
channel (CHB or CH2), if the front passenger is
listening to a DVD or auxiliary device.
The remote control will not operate any of the
RSA features.
RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press this
button to turn on the RSA system. Press this
button to switch between playing the AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of the
sources is not loaded, the system will skip
over the source when this button is pressed. Hold
this button down to turn off RSA.
Q, R, q, r, (Directional Arrows): Up
Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM tuner,
or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to switch
between the station presets. Press this button
while sourcing the single CD player to go to the
next track. Press this button while sourcing
the six-disc CD player to go to the next disc.
43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press this
button to select the correct headphone. Then press
the left or right arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the headphone volume.
Left Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to
seek down. Press this button while sourcing the
single CD player, or the six-disc CD player to go to
the previous track.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen next to the auxiliary
and headphone jacks. Press this button while
using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing
to blank the video screen and to mute the audio.
The power indicator lights on the DVD player
will flash. Turning on the parental control will also
disable all other button operations from the
remote control and the DVD player, except for the
eject button. Press this button again to restore
operation of the RSA, DVD player, and remote
control.
Right Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to seek
up. Press this button while sourcing the single
CD player, or the six-disc CD player to go to the
next track.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player then the system will power
up in auxiliary mode.
Down Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner to change the BAND from AM/FM tuner
to the front CD player or to the XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
329
Mobile Digital Media System
GM Mobile Digital Media System
Your vehicle may have the GM Mobile Digital
Media system which is made up of a digital media
player, a wireless game controller, the digital
media storage (DMS) cartridge, the USB 2.0 cradle
(docking station), and the PhatNoise™ Media
Manager software.
Digital Media Player
The digital media player
is contained in an
overhead console. It is
attached to the
vehicle’s overhead rail
system, located
behind the second row
domelamp.
See the following information to learn more about
the components that make up the complete
Digital Media system.
The overhead console has an opening that opens
downward and is used to insert or remove the
DMS cartridge. Pull the panel down to insert the
removable cartridge. Close this panel to completely
hide the cartridge inside the console.
With the DMS cartridge inserted, the digital media
player is capable of playing back all of the content
that has been stored on the cartridge. Audio content
is accessible through the radio and steering wheel
controls. Audio, videos, and games are accessible
through the rear seat video screen.
330
Wireless Game Controller
DMS (Digital Media Storage) Cartridge
Most of the functions on
the game controller will
vary, depending on
the game being played.
The DMS cartridge is a
palm-sized 40GB
portable hard drive.
The wireless game controller will allow the rear
seat passengers to interact with the video games
being played. While playing a game, press the
buttons on the controller to send commands to the
game being played.
This type of cartridge should allow for storage
of up to 5,000 songs in MP3 format, or up to
15 typical movies in MPEG format, and hours of
game collections, or any combination of the three.
331
USB 2.0 Cradle
PhatNoise™ Media Manager
This type of cradle is
the docking station for
the DMS cartridge.
The USB 2.0 cradle is the docking station that
connects the DMS cartridge to the home computer
allowing new content to be added to the DMS
cartridge. When the cradle is connected to
the home computer, you can read from and write
to the DMS cartridge. The system is compatible
with home computers that support USB
communication (Microsoft® Windows 98 SR2 and
higher).
The USB 2.0 cradle is also backward compatible
for computers equipped with USB 1.1.
332
The PhatNoise™ Media Manager (PMM) supports
the in-vehicle GM Mobile Digital Media system.
The PMM can be used to save audio CDs to the
DMS cartridge as well as organize and transfer
existing tracks on your PC, load video files
onto your DMS cartridge, purchase the preloaded
videos and games, and much more.
Quick Start Guide
Selecting Your Mobile Digital Media as the
Active Source
Your radio and rear seat entertainment system
communicate with the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, as one compact unit that can be
accessed by everyone seated inside the vehicle.
The GM Mobile Digital Media system can hold
thousands of songs, hours of videos, and
hundreds of games.
To help use this system, see the following “Quick
Start” information:
• Front seat driver and passenger, use the radio
and steering wheel controls to access the
music collection with PhatNoise Voice Index™
technology. The preset buttons can be used
to select the browsing category. The Next,
Previous, and Seek buttons can be used to
browse within a browsing category. Browse the
music collection by artist, album, genre, or
custom playlist as the system uses the voice
mode to announce these selections. See
“Using the GM Mobile Digital Media System
for Front Seat Audio Entertainment” later
in this manual.
• Rear seat passengers, use the wireless DVD
remote control to navigate the menu displayed
on the overhead DVD video screen, then
select to play music, videos, or games.
A dedicated game controller is included with
the Mobile Digital Media package. See
“Using the GM Mobile Digital Media System
for Rear Seat Entertainment” later in this
manual.
Your vehicle may have audio steering wheel
controls. Some audio controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 353 in your owner manual.
If your vehicle has the OnStar®/Mute audio
steering wheel control, read the following
instructions.
333
For vehicles with OnStar®:
• Press and hold the mute button to activate
OnStar®.
• Press and release this button once again
to deactivate OnStar® mode and go to
mute mode.
• Press this button twice to return to sound from
the GM Mobile Digital Media system.
Using GM Mobile Digital Media System
for Front Seat Audio Entertainment
For vehicles without OnStar®:
• Press the mute button to silence the system,
press and release this button once again to
turn the sound back on.
A. Album
B. Artist
C. Genre
334
D. Playlist
E. Mode Items
F. Tracks
The GM Mobile Digital Media is controlled through
the radio and steering wheel controls on your
vehicle’s audio system. This system functions
differently than a typical CD changer. The Digital
Media system allows you to switch between
different playback modes. These modes determine
the next song that will play. Using modes, you
can browse through playlists, artists, albums, and
genres while the system reads Voice Index™
names to you while you drive. By selecting Playlist
Mode, you can access the music collection in
the order placed onto the DMS cartridge, or you
can have the system sort the music by Album,
Artist, or Genre by selecting the corresponding
Modes.
Starting the System for Front Seat
Entertainment
The GM Mobile Digital Media system is available
through the DMS mode of your radio. This
system will power on and off automatically and
resume where the system last stopped.
To begin playback, follow the instructions listed
below:
1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM Mobile
Digital Media player.
2. Turn on your radio and switch to the DMS
mode by pressing the CD/AUX button on
your radio.
3. Press any of the first four pushbuttons (A-D)
to select different browse modes.
4. Press the left or right SEEK/SCAN arrow (E)
to navigate through the mode items.
5. Turn the tune knob (F) to navigate through
songs in a song list.
335
Modes Overview
The numbered preset buttons one through four
are used to change the order tracks are grouped
and played. For example, in artist mode, all
tracks are grouped by artist names. Artist names
are listed alphabetically.
The SEEK/SCAN arrows are used to change the
mode item. For example, in Album Mode this will
change to the next or previous album. The mode list
name will display for five seconds, time-out, then
update to show which list the GM Mobile Digital
Media system is currently playing.
The tune knob is used to change the song within
the current category. For example, while in a
playlist (Playlist Mode) turning the tune knob to
the right will change from track 1 to track 2.
t SEEK/SCAN u: Once a mode has been set,
navigate through the categories within that mode
by pressing the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow.
The category items will display for five seconds,
time-out, then update to show which category the
Digital Media system is currently playing.
To change the song that is currently playing, press
the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow to navigate
through the songs.
336
Setting the Browse Mode Using Voice
Index™
The system automatically organizes all of the
songs on the DMS (digital media storage)
cartridge for you. With Voice Index™ browsing,
the six numbered pushbuttons are used as mode
buttons to browse as the system reads album,
artist, genre and playlist names to you while
you drive.
1-6 (Pushbuttons): The GM Digital Media system
uses the numbered station preset buttons to
switch through the browse modes. Press one of
the pushbuttons to set the browse mode. The
selected browse mode will be announced and the
browse mode name will appear on the display.
The preset pushbuttons and the modes associated
with those numbers are:
• (1) Album
• (2) Artist
• (3) Genre
• (4) Playlist
• (5) Not Used
• (6) Not Used
Changing Song Lists Within a
Browse Mode
Each browse mode contains lists of songs. For
example, Genre mode might contain a list of
Classical songs, a list of Rock songs, and a list of
Country songs.
Once the audio system is set to one of the
four modes, press the SEEK/SCAN button to
navigate through the song lists. For example,
press the right arrow while in Album mode
to change to the next album. Press the left arrow
to go back to the previous Album item.
t SEEK/SCAN u: Press the SEEK/SCAN
button once to change to the next song list.
Mode 1 (Album Mode): Press the (1) pushbutton
to put the system into Album mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Album. Albums are listed
alphabetically in groups of Artists.
Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Press the (2) pushbutton
to put the system into Artist mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Artist. Artists are listed in
alphabetical order.
Mode 3 (Genre Mode): Press the (3) pushbutton
to put the system into Genre mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Genre in alphabetical
order.
Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Press the (4) pushbutton
to put the system into Playlist mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Playlist in the order the
playlists were saved to the DMS cartridge.
The Album, Artist, and Genre lists are generated
and organized automatically using the
Phatnoise™ Media Manager.
Seeking Through Song List Titles
t SEEK/SCAN u: Press and hold the
SEEK/SCAN button for more than 2 seconds to
start seeking through song list titles. Press
this button again to stop on a song list title.
The Digital Media system will announce the
following in each mode:
Mode 1 (Album Mode): Album names are
announced.
337
Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Artist names are
announced. Press and hold the SEEK/SCAN
button until the system announces the first letter of
each artist name.
Using the GM Mobile Digital Media
System for Rear Seat Entertainment
Rear seat passengers
can enjoy audio, video
and games over the
wireless headphones.
Mode 3 (Genre Mode): The first letter of Artist
names are announced in alphabetical order. Press
and hold the SEEK/SEEK button until the system
announces the first letter of each artist name.
Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Seeking through songs
is not available in Playlist Mode.
Finding Songs in a Song List
After finding a playlist, artist, album, or genre,
navigate through the songs by turning the
tune knob.
Using the Fast Forward and Fast Reverse
Buttons
{| (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press and
hold the fast forward or fast reverse arrow to
fast forward or reverse within the current track.
338
Overhead Video Screen
Access to the Audio, Video, and Games on the
menu system is displayed on the video screen.
The DVD remote control and the controls on the
DVD player itself can be used to make the
selections.
Starting the System for Rear Seat
Entertainment
The GM Mobile Digital Media system is available
through the auxiliary mode of the DVD player.
To begin using the system, follow the instruction
list below:
1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM Mobile
Digital Media player.
2. Turn on your video screen by pressing the
power button.
3. Switch to the DMS mode by pressing the
AUX button.
Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control
The on-screen menus provide access to the
Audio, Video, and Game content on your digital
media storage (DMS) cartridge. Use the DVD
remote control to navigate the on-screen menus.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Up List
Top Menu
Left
Down List
E.
F.
G.
H.
Select
Options
Right
Return to Current Selection
n, q, p, o (Up List, Down List, Right, and
Left Directional Arrows): For the GM Mobile
Digital Media system, press the up list or down list
directional arrows (A, D) to move the highlight
area up or down the list of items.
Press the right directional arrow (G) to go further
into the selected item, or press the left directional
arrow (C) to go back one menu level.
339
r (Enter/Select): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the enter/select button (E) to
go into any selected menu item.
v (Title/Top Menu): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the title/top menu button (B)
to jump to the start screen.
DVD Remote Control Batteries
If the remote control does not seem to be working,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See
Remote Control, “Battery Replacement” in your
vehicle’s owner manual.
Browsing Audio
q (Return/Current Selection): For the
GM Mobile Digital Media system, if audio is playing
or in the pause mode, press the return/current
selection button (H) to go back to the current
selection.
y (Menu/Options): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the menu/options button (F)
to display the options list.
c (Stop): For the GM Mobile Digital Media
system, press this button to stop playback of the
selected option.
r / j (Play/Pause): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press this button to start playback of
a selected option. Press this button while an option
is in the play mode to pause it. Press it again to
continue playback of the current option.
340
1. Select the Audio option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through the menu options such as
album, artist, playlist or genre. See “Navigating
the On-Screen Menus Using the DVD
Remote Control” earlier in this section for
more information.
3. Press the select button (E) on the remote
control to begin playing an album, artist,
genre, playlist, or song. See “Navigating the
On-Screen Menus Using the DVD Remote
Control” earlier in this section for more
information.
341
Video Browsing
Browse digital videos stored on the system
through the menu display. MPEG format is
supported, so you can play back recorded shows
and movies from television, home movies,
downloaded videos and pre-packaged feature
films and shows. See the following instructions for
further screen display information:
4. If you want to find a particular song, press the
right directional arrow (G) on the remote
control to go further into the selected item.
See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control” earlier in this
section for more information.
1. Select the Video option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
342
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through preloaded videos and
unlocked video playlists. See “Navigating the
On-Screen Menus Using the DVD Remote
Control” earlier in this section for more
information.
3. If you want to find a particular video, press
the right directional arrow (G) on the remote
control to go further into the selected item.
See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control” earlier in this
section for more information.
343
Games Browsing
Browse games that are stored on the system
through the menu display. Video games are
preloaded on the DMS cartridge and played with
rich screen graphics and the included wireless
game controller.
1. Select the Games option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
344
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through the preloaded game
packages. Game packages can be purchased
and unlocked from your desktop computer.
See the PhatNoise™ Media Manager Owner’s
Manual for more information on how to
unlock games.
Wireless Game Controller
A.
B.
C.
D.
Start Button
Start Light
Select Button
Select Light
E. Left Thumbstick
F. Left Rockerpad
G. Right Thumbstick
345
The wireless game controller transmits radio
frequency signals to the overhead monitor.
Wireless means, there are no cords to hinder your
movement while playing games.
The key pad as shown above has six buttons
located on the upper right side of the game
controller.
Wireless Game Controller Synchronization
In the event that your GM Mobile Digital Media
game controller needs to be re-synchronized with
your vehicle, open the battery compartment
and remove a battery. As soon as the battery is
replaced, the game controller will synchronize with
the vehicle during the next ignition cycle.
Wireless Game Controller Play Mode
The functionality of your GM Mobile Digital Media
Game Controller is dependant upon the game
being played. In cases where there are two player
options for a game, you may desire to have a
second controller in your vehicle which may
be purchased through your retailer.
346
Wireless Game Controller Power
Saving Mode
Your GM Mobile Digital Media Game Controller
has a built-in power saving mode to conserve
battery life. When not in use, the game controller
will automatically go into “Sleep” mode. The
game controller can be awakened at any time by
pressing the “Start” button.
Important Safety and Handling
Instructions
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment may cause harmful
interference to radio communications, if it is not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions provided. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, consult the retailer for help.
This device also complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Read the following for instructions on handling and
taking care of your Mobile Digital Media system
and its components.
Digital Media Storage (DMS) Cartridge Care
• Do not leave the DMS cartridge in locations
with extremely high temperatures such as
on a car dashboard or in the rear window
where it will be subject to direct sunlight.
• Do not drop the DMS cartridge or subject it to
a violent shock.
• Do not spill liquid on the DMS cartridge or
submerge the DMS cartridge in liquid. The
only effective protection for data and
other material stored on the DMS cartridge is
the regular backing up of that data by you.
347
Mobile Digital Media Player Care
• Never spray any type of liquid such as a
cleaning agent inside of an open cartridge
panel on the Digital Media player. Doing this
may damage the parts or inside mechanism
needed to help operate the unit.
• Do not use any object to probe the opening of
the Mobile Digital Media player and do not put
any body parts or other foreign objects in
the opening of the product.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Cause and Solution
The Digital Media system and RSE system will not
come on at all.
• A fuse in the car has blown. After checking for
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA NOT
INSERTED.
• The DMS cartridge is not fully inserted. Fully
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA LOADING.
• The system is still booting. Please wait up to
short circuits in the wires, replace the fuse with
one of the same rating.
insert the DMS cartridge.
15 seconds for the system to boot and then
switch back to digital media mode.
348
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA ERROR.
Cause and Solution
• The DMS cartridge is not operating properly or
is damaged. See your retailer if the problem
persists.
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA FILE ERROR.
• A file on your DMS cartridge is corrupted and
will not play properly. Run the PhatNoise DMS
Doctor on your computer and follow the
recommendations.
The green light blinks at a steady rate for longer than
20 seconds.
• You have updated the firmware on the DMS
cartridge and the Mobile Digital Media system
is reprogramming itself. DO NOT REMOVE
THE DMS CARTRIDGE. Allow the Digital
Media system to reprogram itself for up to 10
minutes. When reprogramming is complete, the
lights will turn off and stay off. The system will
be ready to use.
349
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
No Sound.
Cause and Solution
• Adjust the volume of the head unit.
• Make sure the head unit has the Digital Media
player as the active source.
No Sound.
The head unit cannot access the Digital Media system.
350
• File(s) on your cartridge may be corrupt. Run
the PhatNoise DMS Doctor on your computer
and follow the recommendations.
• If you have just downloaded new firmware, this
is normal. Wait about seven minutes until the
green light stops blinking, then both lights
should go off.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
Audio skipping occurs during playback.
Cause and Solution
Many things can cause a “skip”, or any break during
playback. If you are hearing breaks in playback, here
are some things to check:
• When you hear a skip, restart the track, or
seek backwards a bit, to hear if the skip is
actually in the music file.
• Check to see if you are using the latest
firmware and desktop software. This is very
important, as software is updated frequently.
See PhatNoise Music Manager manual.
• Sometimes a heavily fragmented cartridge can
skip due to increased seek times. Defragment
the cartridge for best performance. See
PhatNoise Media Manager™ software
instructions for defragmenting a cartridge.
WMA files are not playing in the Mobile Digital Media
system.
Some software such as Windows Media Player features
copy protection in their WMA encoding tools. This
prevents the tracks from playing on any device other
than your computer. Disable any “Copy Protect Music”
check box when encoding music. Consult your
software’s manual for more information.
351
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
Voice prompts are missing in the vehicle.
Cause and Solution
Check your voice prompt settings on your desktop
computer:
•
•
•
•
Insert the DMS.
Open the Device view and select the DMS.
Press the Hardware Options button.
Open the DMS Database/Voice Prompts tab
and click Fix Voice Prompts.
Customer Assistance Center
Theft-Deterrent Feature
For customer assistance in the United States, call
1-877-GM-PHATN (877-467-4286) or contact
the Customer Assistance Center through
the internet at gmmobilemediasupportgedas.com
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and
LOCKED will appear on the display.
For customer assistance in Canada, see the
Customer Assistance Offices in the index of your
vehicle’s owner manual.
352
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to
go to the previous or next track, if more than
eight seconds have played. If either arrow is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
They include the following:
wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears
on the display. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The sound will mute while seeking or scanning.
The radio will only seek or scan stations with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations that
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will go to the next preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press this
button again to stop scanning. The radio will
only scan preset stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
$ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this
button to play a CD.
wu x (Volume): Press the up or down arrow
to increase or decrease the volume.
353
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
354
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the
hood of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
355
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle
can interfere with the performance of the XM™
system. Make sure that the XM™ satellite antenna
is not obstructed.
356
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. To change the volume level of the chime,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level will
change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change
back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and
NORMAL will appear on the radio display.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a
factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle
chimes.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 358
Defensive Driving ...................................... 358
Drunken Driving ........................................ 359
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 362
Braking ...................................................... 362
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 363
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 365
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 365
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 367
Steering .................................................... 369
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 372
Passing ..................................................... 372
Loss of Control .......................................... 374
Driving at Night ......................................... 375
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 376
City Driving ............................................... 380
Freeway Driving ........................................ 381
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 382
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 383
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 384
Winter Driving ........................................... 386
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 390
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 391
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 391
Towing ........................................................ 396
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 396
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 396
Level Control ............................................. 398
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 398
357
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving
is: Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device
in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 32.
358
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. Rear-end
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in a
safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
359
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her
same body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
360
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in
a cab; or if you are with a group, designate
a driver who will not drink.
361
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They are
the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator.
All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 365 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 367.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 412.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 226.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
362
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is
going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning
Light on page 227.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 412.
363
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
364
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will
not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will
come on in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the traction control system is limiting wheel
spin. You may feel or hear the system working,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
365
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control.
This warning light will
come on to let you
know if there is
a problem with your
traction control system.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message in
the DIC comes on and stays on or comes on
while you are driving, there’s a problem with your
traction control system. Have the traction
control system serviced by your Saturn retailer as
soon as possible.
When this warning message is on, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message in the DIC will come
on to remind you that the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
366
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you ever
need to. You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 391 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 390.
To turn the system off,
press the traction
control button located
on the center of
the instrument panel.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button, the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message will go off, but the system will
not turn off until there is no longer a current
need to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message will come on to remind
you the system is off.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control
system warning message should go off.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 412 for more information.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak® which
combines anti-lock brake, traction and stability
control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to
drive away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to insure there are no problems. You
may hear or feel the system working. This
is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with your vehicle.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the vehicle has gone through heavy acceleration
or braking or multiple turns during the first two miles
of driving after starting your vehicle, the STABILITY
CONTROL OFF message may appear on the DIC.
If this is the case, your vehicle does not need
servicing. You will need to turn the vehicle off and
then restart it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either
message appears on the DIC, and your vehicle has
not gone through hard acceleration, braking or
multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message will
appear on the DIC only when the system is
both on and activated. It means that an advanced
computer-controlled system has come on to
help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in
which you are steering. StabiliTrak® activates
when the computer senses that your vehicle is just
starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of
ice or other slippery spot on the road. When
the system activates, you may hear a noise or feel
a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
367
When the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
message is on, you should continue to steer in the
direction you want to go. The system is designed
to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving
situations by making the most of whatever road
conditions will permit. For more information on the
stability messages, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 234.
If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the traction
control system warning light will illuminate, and
the STABILITY CONTROL OFF message
will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you
with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
To realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary to
turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your
vehicle to attempt to free it. See Rocking
Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 391 and
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 390.
368
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels
(engine speed management) and by applying
brakes.
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle. It will
activate and display the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message in the DIC if it senses that
one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving.
If the brake traction-control system activates
constantly or if the brakes have heated up due
to high-speed braking, brake traction-control will be
disabled and the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
message will be displayed. In the limited mode,
the traction control system will only use engine
traction-control and is limited in its ability to provide
optimal performance since the system will not
utilize brake traction-control to control slip on the
drive wheels. The system will return to normal
operation after the brakes have cooled. This can
take up to two minutes or longer depending
on brake usage.
The traction control system may activate on
dry or rough roads or under conditions such as
heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt
upshifts/downshifts of the transaxle. When this
happens you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.
Steering
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
message will appear on the DIC and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise again,
you may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Control on page 188.
Steering Tips
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your retailer for
service.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is
the one factor you can control.
369
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both
control systems — steering and braking — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,
adding the hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering
and acceleration — can overwhelm those
places where the tires meet the road and make
you lose control. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 365 and StabiliTrak® System
on page 367.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease
up on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
370
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 412.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or
a child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid
these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 362. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
371
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
372
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
•
•
•
•
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
373
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Let us review what driving experts say
about what happens when the three control
systems — brakes, steering, and
acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
374
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
the glare from headlamps behind you.
375
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
376
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.
On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or
turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is not
as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not
have much tread left, you will get even less traction.
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if
rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface
may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned
for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiper and
washer system in good shape and keep your
windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber
start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake
pedal lightly until your brakes work
normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,
try to slow down before you hit them.
377
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
puddles or standing water, drive through them
very slowly.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can
if your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
378
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
just your parking lamps — to help make
you more visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and
be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 462.
379
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
380
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 381.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
381
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
382
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make
too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts at Saturn retailers all across
North America. They will be ready and willing to
help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
383
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
384
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
385
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a
flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective
warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under
severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or
grip, and will need to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 462.
386
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
If you have a traction system, it will improve your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. But you can turn the traction system off if you
ever need to. You should turn the traction
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,
mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390. Even if
your vehicle has a traction system, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the traction system off, such as
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 365
and StabiliTrak® System on page 367.
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
387
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 363.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps
of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
388
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under
your vehicle. This can cause deadly
CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you
might not know it is in your vehicle.
Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side
of the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
389
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. And, the transaxle or
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.
That could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.
If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 391.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 480.
390
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
If your vehicle has traction control, you should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 365 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 367. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a
few tries, it may need to be towed out. If your
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 396.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
391
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 462 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 469.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your
vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
392
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 398 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
393
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
394
Certification/Tire Label
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your retailer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
395
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
396
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 543.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind
a motorhome. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are known as
“dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device know
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
on a Long Trip on page 382.
Dinghy Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed
with all of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with the two rear wheels on the ground.
See “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
Dolly Towing
To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed
for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
397
Level Control
On vehicles equipped with automatic level control,
the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept
level as you load or unload your vehicle. However,
you should still not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
You may hear the compressor operating when you
load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as
the system self-adjusts. This is normal. The
compressor should operate for brief periods of
time. If the sound continues for an extended period
of time, your vehicle needs service.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your retailer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your retailer
for advice and information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Always follow the instructions in
this section and check with your retailer
for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
398
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify the
trailering capacity of vehicle, you should read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat. The trailer also adds
considerably to wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only
where you live but also where you’ll be driving.
A good source for this information can be
state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle, or other parts could be
damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a
lower gear when towing a trailer. Operating
your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer
will minimize heat buildup and extend the
life of your transaxle.
399
Three important considerations have to do
with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, and how much your
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.
Vehicle
Two-Wheel-Drive
It can also depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight
of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum
trailer weight for your vehicle.
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
*GCWR
3.29
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Any vehicle without the V92 trailering package or heavy-duty cooling package is limited to a 2,000 lb (907 kg)
trailer rating and a 7,000 lb (3 175 kg) GCWR.
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your retailer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at the
address listed in your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information Booklet.
400
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Center, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers,
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 391 for more information
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight of 350 lbs (159 kg) for your vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more
than the total of the additional weight.
401
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front
axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.
It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a
RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times
as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
402
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped
with some of the latest options and you have a
front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers
with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as
well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the
front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum
trailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).
You may go further and think you must limit
tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must
still consider the effect on the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs
(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg)
on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the
actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by
1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue
weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need
the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you do not seal
them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 151. Dirt and water can, too.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these
numbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rear
edge of the driver’s door or see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 391. Then be sure you do not go
over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
403
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and
they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will
be able to install, adjust, and maintain them
properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes,
do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not
work well, or at all.
404
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness or death.
See Engine Exhaust on page 151.
To maximize your safety when towing
a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary
repairs before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your
vehicle through a window in the rear
or another opening, drive with your
front, main heating or cooling system
on and with the fan on any speed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
This will bring fresh, outside air into
your vehicle. Do not use the climate
control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle. See Climate
Control System on page 205 or Dual
Climate Control System on page 209.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you
check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and
any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead
when you are towing a trailer. And, because
you are a good deal longer, you will need to
go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
405
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could
be damaged. Avoid making very sharp
turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will
not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
406
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It is important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you need
to, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
do the following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift
into PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply
your parking brake, and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
407
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you do the following:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling
system, and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness
package located in the glove box. It can be
connected from the rear of your vehicle to your
trailer. Contact your retailer for more information.
408
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 412
Accessories and Modifications ................... 412
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 413
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 413
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...................................... 414
Fuel ............................................................. 414
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 414
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 414
California Fuel ........................................... 415
Additives ................................................... 415
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 416
Filling the Tank ......................................... 417
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 419
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 420
Hood Release ........................................... 421
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 422
Engine Oil ................................................. 423
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 426
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 428
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 430
Engine Coolant .......................................... 432
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 435
Engine Overheating ................................... 435
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ..................................... 437
Cooling System ......................................... 438
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 443
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 444
Brakes ...................................................... 445
Battery ...................................................... 449
Jump Starting ............................................ 450
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 455
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 455
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 456
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) ........................... 457
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ...................................... 458
License Plate Lamp ................................... 459
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 460
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 460
409
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ............................................................ 462
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 463
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 466
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 469
High-Speed Operation ............................... 471
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 472
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 473
Buying New Tires ...................................... 474
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 476
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 477
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 478
Wheel Replacement .................................. 478
Tire Chains ............................................... 480
Accessory Inflator ...................................... 480
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 483
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 484
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 485
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ....................................... 488
Secondary Latch System ........................... 495
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 497
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 500
410
Appearance Care ........................................ 501
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 501
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 502
Leather ...................................................... 503
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 504
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 504
Weatherstrips ............................................ 504
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 505
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 505
Finish Care ............................................... 505
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ......................................... 506
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 507
Tires ......................................................... 507
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 508
Finish Damage .......................................... 508
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 508
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 508
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 509
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 510
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 510
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 510
Electrical System ........................................ 511
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 511
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 511
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 511
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 511
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 512
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 512
Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 514
Capacities and Specifications .................... 518
411
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. We hope you
will go to your retailer for all your service needs.
You will get genuine Saturn parts and
Saturn-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
Saturn accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.
When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask
for Saturn accessories, you will know that
Saturn-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine Saturn
accessories.
412
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 553.
413
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 99.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 534.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep your engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
414
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). Saturn recommends against the use
of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
page 415 for additional information.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control label. If this
fuel is not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 229. If this occurs, return to
your authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
415
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
Motors recommends against the use of such
gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the
life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
416
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with
dual sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will
only open partway.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether.
417
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open
the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can
happen if your tank is nearly full, and is
more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to
stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or
overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after
you have finished pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 505.
418
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 229.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel
cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 241 for more information.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling,
do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the
flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or
by notifying the station attendant. Leave
the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage your
fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 229.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
419
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
420
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located
under the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the
underhood release to the right. It is located
near the center of the hood, above the grille.
4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from its
storage clip.
The hood prop may be hot due to increased
engine temperatures under the hood, so
be careful when handling it. Use your hood
prop sleeve when handling the hood prop.
5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot in
the underside of the hood, on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. It is marked by an arrow.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressure
on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to its
retainer. Then let the hood down and close it
firmly.
3. Lift the hood.
421
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
422
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 514.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 450.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 444.
D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 435.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 443.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 423.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 423.
H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 430.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 445.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 428.
K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling
System on page 438.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil
several minutes to drain back into the oil pan.
If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might
not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
423
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, you will need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 518.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
424
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 422 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in the
cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
425
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
426
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will
be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, you must reset the system
every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 241. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your retailer
has trained people who will perform this work using
genuine Saturn parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you
must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine
off, repeatedly push the set/reset button until
OIL is displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the
set/reset button for five seconds. The
number will disappear and be replaced
by 100 (indicating 100% oil life remaining).
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
427
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 522 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
428
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Do not use
compressed air to clean the filter.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.
2. Remove the duct.
3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the
panel with the slots at the bottom of the
housing.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place.
If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs
are seated correctly in the slots.
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
429
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 524, and
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at the
your retailer’s service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
430
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is
180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
The automatic transaxle dipstick is located
toward the back of the engine compartment,
near the brake master cylinder reservoir.
The dipstick handle is a red loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 422 for
more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three
seconds, and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the
proper fluid to bring the level into the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 530.
431
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 435.
432
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning messages and gages work
as they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What Engine Coolant to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times
a year, have your retailer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed
in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 530 for more information.
433
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery
tank is located on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle, above
the engine air
cleaner/filter. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 422
for more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the full cold mark, or a little higher. When your
engine is warm, the level should be above the full
cold mark or a little higher. The full cold mark
is a line with an arrow pointing down at it, located
on the front of the coolant recovery tank.
434
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never
have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 438.
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle
is a pressure-type cap and must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss and possible
engine damage from overheating. Be sure
the cap is properly closed.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 422
for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage
on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 228.
Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE
COOLANT HOT message displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 241.
435
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open
the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 437 for
information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
436
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 437 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see
or hear no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this mode, you
will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will
indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
system. See Engine Oil on page 423.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
437
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood,
here is what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Radiator
Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine
Cooling Fans
438
C. Engine Coolant
Recovery Tank
D. Recovery tank
FULL COLD mark
The coolant level should be at or above the
full cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leak
at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 437 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
439
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 432
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture
will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but
you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
440
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at
or above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before you do it.
441
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure
cap when the
cooling system,
including the radiator
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left, close
the cap and wait for the system to cool down.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
442
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 432
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the
engine and the compartment.
5. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
6. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
7. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is closed properly.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located
toward the rear of the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 422
for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Filling the Coolant Recovery Tank
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the full
cold mark.
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.
443
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
What Washer Fluid to Use
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is
at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 530.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
444
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 422
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 422 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well,
or will not work at all.
445
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 530.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 226.
446
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 505.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
447
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturn
torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake
trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
448
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and
work well together if the vehicle is to have
really good braking. Your vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality Saturn brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake
linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved Saturn
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes
may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle
for 25 days or more, remove the black,
negative (−) cable from the battery. This will
help keep your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 450 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
449
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power
sliding door, a low-voltage battery or replacing
a battery may cause the system to become
inoperative. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 121 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result
in costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
450
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
Find the positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) jump starting terminal for
that purpose.
451
The terminal is located
under the fuse block
cover. Remove
the cover to access
the remote positive (+)
terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 422 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal. You
should always use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal
on your battery.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
452
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+)
to negative (−) or you will get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other
parts too. Do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part,
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
453
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical connection
is just as good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,
it probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected
or removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
454
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
and Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal
cover or underhood fuse block cover to
its original position.
Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement
Bulbs on page 460.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
455
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 421 for more information.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) by
turning it towards the headlamp assembly
and pulling it straight out.
456
3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of the
headlamp assembly.
4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the socket wiring harness
connector from the headlamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove from the assembly.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnect
the bulb socket wiring harness and connect
to the new bulb socket.
To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the old
bulb out and push a new bulb in.
8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into
the bulb assembly and turning it clockwise
to secure.
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following:
1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove the
headlamp assembly. See Headlamps and
Sidemarker Lamps on page 456 for more
information.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove from the assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket.
4. Replace with a new bulb
457
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into
the bulb assembly and turning it clockwise
to secure.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the taillamp housing.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector
from the taillamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal or
back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128
for more information.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp housing on
the inboard side.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp Bulb
458
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove.
6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb
out of the socket and gently pushing in
a new bulb.
7. Replace the bulb socket by inserting and
turning clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by
inserting the outboard locating/retaining
pins until the lamp is seated.
9. Secure with the inboard screws.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of
the license plate lamps to the fascia.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
459
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up
Front Turn Signal, DRL
and Parking
Bulb Number
3057KX
3157NAK
High-Beam and Low-Beam
Headlamps
H11
License Plate Lamp
168
Sidemarker
194
Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your retailer.
460
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 522 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 532.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly
do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield.
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the tabs on each
side of the wiper blade assembly click
into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the
steps listed above.
2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of the
wiper blade assembly to remove the wiper
arm (A) from the blade (C).
461
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
CAUTION:
462
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 469.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
463
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 477.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 500 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 483.
464
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire
or compact spare tire should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire
pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 469.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered
to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
465
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry
a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
466
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission/
transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 469.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
467
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 391.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 469 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 391.
468
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 473.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 477.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 391.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
469
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the
driver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the tire and loading information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 391. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 500.
470
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed operation,
in excellent condition, and set to the
correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P225/60R17 size tires,
they will require inflation pressure adjustment
when driving your vehicle at speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or
38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is lower. See the
example following. When you end this high-speed
driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 391 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 469.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the
inflation pressure for high-speed driving at
38 psi (262 kPa).
471
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 473
and Wheel Replacement on page 478 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first rotation is the most important. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 522.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 518.
472
When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 484.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
473
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
474
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 463 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on
all wheels. It is all right to drive with
your compact spare temporarily, as it
was developed for use on your vehicle.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 500.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with
those that do not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type (radial
and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
475
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance that
you will crash and suffer serious injury.
Only use Saturn specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a Saturn
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 474 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 412 for
additional information.
476
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
477
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your retailer if any of
these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
478
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset
and be mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
with new Saturn original equipment parts. This
way, you will be sure to have the right wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 484 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
Saturn original equipment wheel.
479
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for
use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the device
if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you
do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
480
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With
it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and
basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your
tires up to the proper pressure.
The accessory inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To access the
accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128
for more information.
2. Lift the lever to move the third row rear
seatback forward. See Third Row Seat
on page 27 for more information.
3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever up.
This symbol is on
the accessory
inflator switch.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make
it explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate any object only
to its recommended pressure.
There may be an accessory inflator kit stored
in the rear compartment on the passenger’s
side. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an
air pressure gage and nozzle adapters.
To use your accessory inflator system, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if
required, to the end of the hose that has
the pressure gage.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you
wish to inflate.
4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light
in the switch will come on to show the
system is working.
481
If the accessory inflator system does not turn on
or the light does not come on, the fuse may
be blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 512 or see your
retailer for service.
Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off
after about 10 minutes. The light in the switch
will blink. After about one minute you can use the
system again. Press the switch and the indicator
light will come on.
Notice: If you run the accessory inflator
longer than 30 minutes at a time, you could
damage the inflator. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Run the inflator
for short periods of time only.
482
After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes,
wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the
accessory inflator.
To turn off the inflator, do the following:
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first
from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
2. Put the protective cap back on.
3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and
store in the rear compartment on the
passenger’s side.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the
bottom of the cover and put it in place. Push down
the tab to secure the cover.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well
out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Get the vehicle under control by steering the
way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use the jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
483
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place.
Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.
See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 182
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain
in the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
484
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The tools needed to remove the spare tire are
located in the storage compartment at the rear of
the vehicle, on the passenger’s side.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 128
for more information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle
has one.
485
3. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting
the tab and pulling the cover off.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
extension (B), and folding wrench (C).
A. Jack
B. Strap
C. Bracket
D. Wing Nut
E. Bag and Tools
4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (E) by
loosening and then removing the wing nut (D)
and bracket (C).
5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and
remove the jacking tools, including the folding
wrench and extension, from the pouch.
486
The compact spare tire is located under the
rear of the vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 500 for more information about the
compact spare.
To remove the compact spare tire, do the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Hoist Shaft
Hoist Assembly
Retainer
Compact Spare Tire
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to
lower the compact spare tire (D) to the
ground. Continue to turn the wrench so the
compact spare tire can be pulled out from
under the vehicle.
E. Extension
(Chisel End)
F. Folding Wrench
1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to the
extension (E) and insert the chisel end on
an angle through the hole in the rear bumper
and into the hoist shaft (A).
3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable to
remove the compact spare tire, so it can
be pulled up through the wheel opening.
The hoist is used to store a full-size or a flat
road tire under the vehicle. See Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 497
for more information.
4. Remove the compact spare tire from the cable.
487
If the compact spare tire will not lower, check
under the vehicle to see if the tire is hanging
loose and the cable end and spring under
the wheel plate are missing. If so, the secondary
latch system is engaged. See Secondary Latch
System on page 495.
To continue changing the flat tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire on page 488.
488
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so,
you will see exposed stainless steel wheel
nuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all of the
wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet. Or, your
vehicle may have steel wheel covers. To remove
the wheel covers and wheel nut caps, loosen
the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction. If needed, you
can finish loosening with your fingers. The plastic
nut caps will not come off. Use the flat end of
the wheel wrench and pry along the edge of the
cover until it comes off. The edge of the wheel
cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay
it face down, as it could become scratched or
damaged. Once you have removed the wheel
cover, use the following procedure to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
Turn the handle counterclockwise about
180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and
you use an impact wrench to remove the wheel
nuts, you could damage the lock nut or
wheel lock key. Do not use an impact wrench
to remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle
has wheel locks.
1. Loosen the wheel
nuts using the
folding wrench,
but do not
remove them.
Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, you could
damage your vehicle. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rear
axle control arms.
Notice: If you position the jack under the
rocker molding and attempt to raise the
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always
position the jack so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located
inboard from the rocker molding.
489
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
A. Front Location
B. Rear Location
2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B)
in the vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rocker
molding. Position the jack and raise the
jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in
the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.
Do not raise the vehicle yet.
3. Put the compact spare tire near you.
490
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
4. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B),
and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the
jack head approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm).
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding
wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the compact spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
491
7. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after a time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
492
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
8. Install the compact
spare tire and
put the wheel nuts
back on with
the rounded end of
the nuts toward
the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding
wheel wrench to the jack and turning the
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the
jack completely.
493
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 518
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications on page 518
for the wheel nut torque specification.
494
10. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence,
as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
11. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store
the wheel cover securely in the rear of the
vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired
or replaced.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire
hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch
system. It is designed to stop a tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the
spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to
work, the tire must be stowed with the valve
stem pointing down.
Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoist
assembly to store either the compact spare or
a flat road tire. See Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools on page 497 for instructions on
storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the spare.
495
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise
the jack until it lifts the secondary latch
device under the wheel plate.
3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare
tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in
place. This lets you know that the secondary
latch has released.
4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the compact spare tire is resting on the
folding wrench.
1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of
the rear bumper. Position the center lift
point of the jack under the center of the
compact spare tire.
496
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands
and pull it out from under the vehicle.
6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the
folding wrench and jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare or
flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has
been repaired or replaced.
497
Storing the Flat or Spare Tire
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs
to be stored with the valve stem pointing
down. If the spare tire is stored with
the valve stem pointing upwards, its
secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is
stored with its valve stem pointing down.
498
To store the spare tire, do the following:
1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with
the valve stem down.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the
back of the cap with the extension of the
shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of
the wheel and start to raise the tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
4. When the tire is almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear
of the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain
tire pressure in the spare.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue turning the folding
wrench until you feel more than two clicks.
This indicates that the compact spare
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The
spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
Storing the Tools
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely.
Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the
tire. If the tire moves, use the folding wrench
to tighten the cable.
A. Strap
B. Bag and Tools
C. Jack
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
499
To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place and push down the tab
so that it rests in the groove. This secures
the cover in place.
Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel
covers until a full size tire is put back on the
vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers
or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over
the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so
you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience.
500
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were
not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your retailer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
501
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
502
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and
gently rub toward the center. Continue
cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed,
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
503
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss
on your instrument panel. The increase in
gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
504
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 530.
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 505.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is
to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. You can get approved
cleaning products from your retailer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 509. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your Saturn retailer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 509.
Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
505
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your
vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by keeping
your vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
506
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
507
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your Saturn
retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body and
paint shop.
508
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your Saturn
retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Description
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray
on wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Usage
509
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
510
You will find this label on the inside of the glove
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 99.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by four internal
fuses in the underhood fuse block. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or
in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by
an internal fuse in the underhood fuse block.
If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,
the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem,
be sure to get it fixed.
The rear washer pump is controlled by a relay
located in the engine compartment, behind
the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The rear
wiper motor is protected by a fuse located in the
instrument panel fuse block.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed.
511
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links.
The instrument panel fuse block is located at
the right end of the instrument panel, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. Open the front
passegner’s door, and remove the cover, to
access the fuse block.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage or use one of the spare fuses
in the underhood fuse block. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without, like the radio or cigarette lighter, and use
its fuse if it is the right amperage. Replace it
as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the
instrument panel fuse block and the underhood
fuse block.
512
Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed.
Fuses
Usage
1
Trunk, Door Locks
2
Electronic Level Control
3
Rear Wiper
4
Radio, DVD Player
5
Interior Lamps
6
OnStar®
7
Keyless Entry Module
8
Cluster, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
9
Cruise Switch
10
Steering Wheel Illumination
11
Power Mirror
12
Stoplamp, Turn Lamps
13
Heated Seats
14
Blank
15
Electronic Level Control
513
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
16
Heated Mirror
26
Blank
17
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
27
Blank
28
Park Lamps, Taillamps
18
Blank
29
Retained Accessory Power
19
Canister Vent Solenoid
30
Rear Defog
20
Park Lamps
PLR
Fuse Puller
21
Power Sliding Door
22
Blank
23
Blank
24
Left Power Sliding Door
31
Power Seats
25
Right Power Sliding Door
32
Power Window
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment. For more information on location
see Engine Compartment Overview on page 422.
514
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed.
Fuses
Usage
1
Right High-Beam
2
Fuel Pump
Fuses
3
BLANK
Usage
Diode
Not Used
515
Fuses
BLANK
Fuses
Usage
Not Used
15
Electronic Ignition
Left High-Beam
16
Fuel Injector
BLANK
Not Used
17
BLANK
Not Used
Climate Control, RPA,
Cruise Control
BLANK
Not Used
18
Electronic Throttle Control
5
Not Used
19
Engine Sensor, Evaporator
6
Air Conditioning Clutch
20
Airbag
7
Horn
21
Not Used
8
Left Low-Beam
22
Not Used
Powertrain Control Module,
Electronic Throttle Control
23
Auxiliary Power
9
24
Front Windshield Washer
10
Not Used
25
AC/DC Inverter
11
Transmission Solenoid
26
Rear Blower
12
Right Low-Beam
27
Front Blower
13
Anti-lock Brake System
28
Front Windshield Wiper
14
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
4
516
Usage
J-Case Fuses
PLR
Usage
Relays
Usage
Fuse Puller
RUN RLY
Starter
29
Fan 1
LO BEAM
Low-Beam
30
Starter Solenoid
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
31
Anti-lock Brake System Motor
32
Blank
AC/CLTCH
33
Fan 2
HI BEAM
High-Beam
34
Front Blower High
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
35
Battery Main 3
WPR2
Wiper 2
36
Rear Defogger
WPR1
Wiper 1
37
Battery Main 2
FAN 1
Fan 1
38
Spare
CRNK
Crank
HORN
IGN MAIN
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Main
FAN2
Fan 2
FAN3
Fan 3
BLANK
Not Used
517
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 530 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under
the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement
7.4 qt
7.0 L
3.9L Engine Front Climate Controls Only
10.77 qt
10.2 L
3.9L Engine with Rear Climate Controls
12.11 qt
11.55 L
4.0 qt
3.8 L
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Capacity
25.1 gal
95.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.9L V6
518
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
1
Automatic
0.040 in (1.1 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 520
Introduction ............................................... 520
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 520
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 520
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 520
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 522
Additional Required Services ..................... 524
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 525
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 526
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 527
At Least Once a Month ............................. 527
At Least Once a Year ............................... 528
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 530
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 532
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 533
Maintenance Record .................................. 534
519
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
520
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time
in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how to
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
Saturn retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 391.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 414.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 522 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 524
and Maintenance Footnotes on page 525 for
further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 413.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your Saturn retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your
service needs, you will know that Saturn-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine Saturn parts.
If you want to purchase service information,
see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 553.
521
Owner Checks and Services on page 526 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants
to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 530 and Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 532. When your
vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All
parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs
done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
We recommend the use of genuine Saturn parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes
on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your Saturn
retailer has Saturn-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine Saturn
parts and reset the system.
522
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 426 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the
message comes on 10 months or more since
the last service or if the message has not come
on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 423. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 426. An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 428. See footnote (g).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 472 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 527.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
523
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 428.
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
524
Maintenance Footnotes
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,
transaxle shift linkage, and the underbody contact
points and linkage.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check
parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect
power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with
genuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring
anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,
rear folding seats, liftgate hinges, fuel door
hinge, power sliding door cable, and sliding door
track(s). More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
525
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. See
Engine Coolant on page 432 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
526
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked.
Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer
can assist you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 530.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 423 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to your engine not covered
by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 469. Check to
make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 484.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 472.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 432 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary.
527
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 147.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your Saturn retailer
for service.
528
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 147.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.
If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),
contact your Saturn retailer for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or others
could be injured and property could be
damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of your vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
529
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 423.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant
on page 432.
530
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering (Saturn Part No. 21007583 or
System
GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Fuel Door
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinge, Liftgate in Canada 10953474).
Hinges and
Power Sliding
Door Cable
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Sliding Door
Track
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
531
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
Saturn retailer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
15222510
—
Engine Oil Filter
89017342
PF61
Spark Plugs
12591131
41-100
Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)
12335833
—
Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm)
12335834
—
Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm)
15192147
—
Part
Windshield Wiper Blades
532
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.9L V6 Engine
533
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 520.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 526 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
534
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
535
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
536
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 538
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 538
Online Owner Center ................................. 541
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 542
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 542
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 543
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 543
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ...................................... 547
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 548
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 552
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 552
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 552
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 552
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 553
537
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are
committed to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before, during and after the
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction
or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved
by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail
management team has the authority and the desire
to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at this level.
538
STEP TWO: Should you need additional
assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the
Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and warranty
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss any
concerns you may have.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give the
Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration
or title, on the upper driver’s side corner of the
dash, or on your roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail
facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its
retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the additional
assistance of a neutral party through our voluntary
participation in a mediation/arbitration program
called BBB Auto Line.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program is
available at no cost to you, our customer.
Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge
and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given
in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program by
using the toll-free telephone number or by writing
them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. Saturn
Corporation reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
539
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after following the procedure
outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
540
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or
you may write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
541
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or to a conventional
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in
Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
542
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada may
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call
1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for your vehicle such
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For vehicles purchased in Canada call
1-800-268-6800.
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000.
543
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may
be restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration and
personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.
544
If you vehicle will not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized retailer. In the
U.S., replacement keys made at the customer’s
expense will be delivered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance provided when the vehicle is mired
in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
time, installation of that tire, in good condition,
will be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered
at no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
• Alternative Service: There may be times when
Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely
assistance, your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission
of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty for
U.S. customers, and the duration of the Base
Warranty Coverage for Canadian customers of the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost
for parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are the
responsibility of the driver.
545
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representatives:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember we are only
a phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:
1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains or other traction devices.
546
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations
to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other
information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
Event Data Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about
the condition of the vehicle and how it was
operated, such as data related to engine speed,
brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
steering performance, including yaw rate, steering
wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is also
recorded. This information has been used
to improve vehicle crash performance and may
be used to improve crash performance of
future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
547
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
548
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is
not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
549
If an Accident Occurs
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by
a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 543 for more
information.
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
550
In some states/provinces with “no fault”
insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries
and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn
retailer or a private collision repair facility to
fix the damage, make sure you are comfortable
with them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility
that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine
GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the repair
and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
551
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
552
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you’ll notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.
Or, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you.
Saturn service manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases, specialized tools
and equipment are necessary to complete
certain repairs. However, the manuals are
available to owners who either have the training,
or wish to gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available
by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and
as described below is applicable only in the fifty
U.S. states and the District of Columbia, and only
for cars and light trucks with a Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds
(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are
also at your participating Saturn retailer. You can
ask to see them.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
553
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then prepare
bulletins for servicing our products better. You
can get these bulletins, too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain
to the proper use and care of your vehicle.
Some describe costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with
the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.
554
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a
new or unexpected condition. Others describe a
quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a
qualified technician may have to determine
if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn Publications
at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 412
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 480
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 203
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ..................................................... 100
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 415
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 511
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 428
Air Conditioning .................................. 205, 209
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 224
Readiness Light ....................................... 223
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 547
Airbag System ............................................... 83
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 100
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 91
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 93
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 99
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 91
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 92
Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 89
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 86
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 355
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System .................................................... 356
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 363
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 227
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 507
Care of Safety Belts ................................ 504
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 508
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 505
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 501
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 502
Finish Care .............................................. 505
Finish Damage ......................................... 508
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 504
Leather .................................................... 503
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 508
Tires ........................................................ 507
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 508
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 509
555
Appearance Care (cont.)
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Mobile Digital Media System ....................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................
Radio with CD .........................................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 325,
Setting the Time ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Automatic Door Lock ...................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
556
505
504
506
270
353
355
355
356
355
330
294
272
328
272
352
354
356
117
430
143
B
Battery ........................................................ 449
Electric Power Management ..................... 198
Run-Down Protection ............................... 199
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 382
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 363
Emergencies ............................................ 365
Parking .................................................... 147
System Warning Light .............................. 226
Brakes ........................................................ 445
Braking ....................................................... 362
Braking in Emergencies ............................... 365
Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 138
Bucket Seats, Rear ....................................... 14
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 455
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps .................................... 457
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 455
License Plate Lamps ................................ 459
Replacement Bulbs .................................. 460
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ..................................... 458
Buying New Tires ........................................ 474
C
Calibration ................................................... 240
California Fuel ............................................. 415
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 413
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 518
Captain Chairs, Rear ..................................... 22
Carbon Monoxide .............. 128, 151, 386, 398
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 504
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 355
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 355
Cargo Lamp ................................................ 198
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 287
Chains, Tire ................................................. 480
Charging System Light ................................ 226
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 229
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 420
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 508
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 63
Infants and Young Children ........................ 59
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 69
Child Restraints (cont.)
Older Children ........................................... 56
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position .......................................... 77
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................. 79
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 67
Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 356
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 205
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 507
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 505
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 502
Finish Care .............................................. 505
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 501
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 504
Leather .................................................... 503
Tires ........................................................ 507
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 508
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 505
Weatherstrips ........................................... 504
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................ 506
557
Climate Control System ............................... 205
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 217
Dual ......................................................... 209
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 212
Rear ............................................... 212, 215
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 548
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 52
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 500
Compass ..................................................... 240
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 133
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 362
Convenience Net ......................................... 173
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 228
Heater, Engine ......................................... 141
Cooling System ........................................... 438
Cruise Control ............................................. 188
Cruise Control Light .................................... 233
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 167
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 542
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 542
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 538
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 543
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 552
558
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
552
552
543
553
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................
Defensive Driving ........................................
Delayed Lighting ..........................................
Delayed Locking ..........................................
DIC Compass ..............................................
Disc, MP3 ...................................................
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp ................................................
Door
Automatic Door Lock ................................
Delayed Locking ......................................
Dual Sliding Doors ...................................
Locks .......................................................
193
358
196
116
240
287
413
196
117
116
118
114
Door (cont.)
Power Door Locks ................................... 116
Power Sliding Door .................................. 121
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 118
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 38
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 234
DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 235
DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 261
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241
Driving
At Night ................................................... 375
City .......................................................... 380
Defensive ................................................. 358
Drunken ................................................... 359
Freeway ................................................... 381
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 384
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 376
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 391
Winter ...................................................... 386
Dual Climate Control System ....................... 209
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..... 294, 309
E
Electric Power Management ........................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Headlamp Wiring .....................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Battery .....................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .....
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ......................
Drive Belt Routing ....................................
Engine Compartment Overview ................
Exhaust ...................................................
Oil ...........................................................
198
511
512
511
512
511
514
511
428
449
229
432
141
228
533
422
151
423
559
Engine (cont.)
Oil Life System ........................................ 426
Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 437
Overheating ............................................. 435
Starting .................................................... 140
Entry Lighting .............................................. 196
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 547
Exit Lighting ................................................ 197
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 55
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 192
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
560
428
508
355
182
185
483
484
497
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle .................................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
Folding Tray ................................................
Front Console Storage Area ........................
Front Reading Lamps ..................................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
430
443
444
170
170
197
457
414
415
415
419
417
416
233
414
414
234
512
512
514
511
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Garage Door Opener .......................... 156,
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
228
233
221
221
157
414
414
167
543
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 182
Head Restraints ............................................ 13
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 511
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement .................................... 455
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ................................ 193
Headlamps (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 185
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 455
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 456
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 185
On Reminder ........................................... 193
Wiper Activated ........................................ 193
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 456
Heated Seats ................................................ 10
Heater ................................................ 205, 209
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ....................... 174
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 233
High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 471
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 383
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 384
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 420
Release ................................................... 421
Horn ............................................................ 182
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 38
561
I
L
Ignition Positions ......................................... 138
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 59
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 469
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 180
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 195
Cluster ..................................................... 220
Interior Lamps Control ................................. 195
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 463
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 199
Cargo ...................................................... 198
Dome ....................................................... 196
Electric Power Management ..................... 198
Exterior .................................................... 192
Front Reading .......................................... 197
Interior Control ......................................... 195
Rear Reading .......................................... 197
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 69
Level Control ............................................... 398
License Plate Lamps ................................... 459
Liftgate ........................................................ 128
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 223
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 227
Brake System Warning ............................. 226
Charging System ..................................... 226
Cruise Control .......................................... 233
Highbeam On .......................................... 233
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 450
K
Keyless Entry System ................................. 106
Keys ........................................................... 105
562
Light (cont.)
Low Fuel Warning ....................................
Malfunction Indicator ................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
TCS Warning Light ..................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ...
Lighting
Delayed ...................................................
Entry ........................................................
Exit ..........................................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Automatic Door Lock ................................
Delayed Locking ......................................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .....
Loss of Control ...........................................
Low Fuel Warning Light ...............................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
234
229
232
224
222
222
232
228
228
196
196
197
391
118
117
116
114
118
116
118
374
234
172
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 524
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 527
At Least Once a Month ............................ 527
At Least Once a Year .............................. 528
Introduction .............................................. 520
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 525
Maintenance Record ................................ 534
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 520
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ............................... 532
Owner Checks and Services .................... 526
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 530
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 522
Using ....................................................... 520
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 520
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 229
Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................... 131
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241
563
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ...........................
Outside Convex Mirror .............................
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................
Outside Power Mirrors .............................
Mobile Digital Media System .......................
MP3 ............................................................
MyGMLink.com ............................................
153
154
154
153
330
287
541
N
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................... 294
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 138
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 532
O
Odometer ....................................................
Odometer, Trip ............................................
Off-Road Recovery ......................................
Oil
Engine .....................................................
Pressure Light ..........................................
564
221
221
372
423
232
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 426
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 56
Online Owner Center ................................... 541
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 154
Other Warning Devices ................................ 182
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 212
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 203
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 154
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 154
Power Mirrors .......................................... 153
Overhead Console .............................. 168, 170
Overhead Console Switchbank .................... 200
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ....................................... 437
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 526
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 508
Park Aid ...................................................... 200
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 148
Shifting Out of ......................................... 149
Parking
Assist ....................................................... 200
Brake ....................................................... 147
Over Things That Burn ............................ 150
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 224
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 217
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 93
Passing ....................................................... 372
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 135
PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 136
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 203
Door Locks .............................................. 116
Electrical System ..................................... 511
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 204
Rear Quarter Windows ............................. 132
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 139
Seat .......................................................... 10
Power (cont.)
Sliding Door ............................................. 121
Steering Fluid .......................................... 443
Windows .................................................. 131
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 55
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 118
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 37
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................
Radios ........................................................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................
Radio with CD .........................................
Rear Seat Audio ............................. 325,
Setting the Time ......................................
Theft-Deterrent .........................................
Understanding Reception .........................
Rear Climate Control System ............. 212,
435
270
355
355
294
272
328
272
352
354
215
565
Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 197
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 52
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 325, 328
Rear Seat Entertainment System ........ 294, 309
Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 14
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 49
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 187
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 153
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 530
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 396
Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 106
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ... 107
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................ 488
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 485
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 460
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 552
Saturn ...................................................... 552
United States Government ....................... 552
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ............... 101
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................ 102
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 139
566
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 48
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 543
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 391
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 533
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 152
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 222
Pretensioners ............................................. 55
Reminder Light ........................................ 222
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 504
Driver Position ........................................... 38
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 38
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 37
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 52
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 49
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 48
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 55
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 48
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 32
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 47
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 522
Seats
Bucket Seats, Rear .................................... 14
Captain Chairs ........................................... 22
Head Restraints ......................................... 13
Heated Seats ............................................. 10
Manual ........................................................ 9
Power Seats .............................................. 10
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 14
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11
Third Row Seat ......................................... 27
Second Row Center Console ...................... 171
Secondary Latch System ............................. 495
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 77
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 79
Security Light .............................................. 232
Service ........................................................ 412
Accessories and Modifications .................. 412
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 414
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 413
Service (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 413
Engine Soon Light ................................... 229
Publications Ordering Information ............. 553
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 99
Setting the Time .......................................... 272
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 508
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 148
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 149
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 47
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 184
Sliding Door, Power ..................................... 121
Sliding Doors, Dual ..................................... 118
Spare Tire
Accessory Inflator ..................................... 480
Compact .................................................. 500
Installing .................................................. 488
Removing ................................................ 485
Storing ..................................................... 497
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 518
Speedometer ............................................... 221
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 367
Starting Your Engine ................................... 140
Steering ...................................................... 369
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 353
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 182
567
Storage Areas .............................................
Convenience Net .....................................
Cupholder(s) ............................................
Floor Console Storage Area .....................
Folding Tray .............................................
Glove Box ................................................
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins ...................
Luggage Carrier .......................................
Overhead Console .......................... 168,
Second Row Center Console ...................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...............
Sun Visors ..................................................
Switchbanks
Overhead Console ...................................
167
173
167
170
170
167
174
172
170
171
390
132
200
T
Tachometer .................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
PASS-Key® III ..........................................
PASS-Key® III Operation ..........................
568
221
458
228
352
133
133
135
136
Third Row Seat ............................................. 27
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 182
Tires ........................................................... 462
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 507
Buying New Tires ..................................... 474
Chains ..................................................... 480
Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 484
Cleaning .................................................. 507
Compact Spare Tire ................................. 500
Different Size ........................................... 476
High-Speed Operation .............................. 471
If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 483
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 469
Inflator, Accessory .................................... 480
Inspection and Rotation ............................ 472
Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 488
Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 488
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 485
Secondary Latch System ......................... 495
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 497
Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 463
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 466
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 477
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 478
Wheel Replacement ................................. 478
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 473
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Control System Warning Light ..................
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Trip Odometer .............................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
396
398
396
365
228
367
430
143
221
184
183
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........
Understanding Radio Reception ...................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................
Universal Home Remote System ........ 156,
Operation ........................................ 158,
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 362
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 391
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................ 547
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 510
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 510
Vehicle Personalization
DIC .......................................................... 261
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 212
Visors .......................................................... 132
200
354
477
157
163
569
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 219
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 241
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 182
Other Warning Devices ............................ 182
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 478
Different Size ........................................... 476
Replacement ............................................ 478
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 67
Windows ..................................................... 130
Manual Rear Quarter ............................... 131
Power ...................................................... 131
Power Rear Quarter ................................. 132
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ...
Washer ....................................................
Washer Fluid ...........................................
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................
Wiper Fuses ............................................
Wipers .....................................................
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ...................
Winter Driving .............................................
Wiper Activated Headlamps .........................
506
186
444
460
511
185
187
386
193
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 293
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 356
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 520
570
Download PDF